1 /* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only */ 2 /* 3 * mac80211 <-> driver interface 4 * 5 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc. 6 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz> 7 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> 8 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH 9 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH 10 * Copyright (C) 2018 - 2020 Intel Corporation 11 */ 12 13 #ifndef MAC80211_H 14 #define MAC80211_H 15 16 #include <linux/bug.h> 17 #include <linux/kernel.h> 18 #include <linux/if_ether.h> 19 #include <linux/skbuff.h> 20 #include <linux/ieee80211.h> 21 #include <net/cfg80211.h> 22 #include <net/codel.h> 23 #include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h> 24 #include <asm/unaligned.h> 25 26 /** 27 * DOC: Introduction 28 * 29 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements 30 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document 31 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware 32 * drivers. 33 */ 34 35 /** 36 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts 37 * 38 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be 39 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any 40 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such 41 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the 42 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even 43 * tasklet function. 44 * 45 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also 46 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions! 47 */ 48 49 /** 50 * DOC: Warning 51 * 52 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will 53 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet. 54 */ 55 56 /** 57 * DOC: Frame format 58 * 59 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver, 60 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are 61 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the 62 * hardware. 63 * 64 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features: 65 * 66 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload 67 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware. 68 * 69 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to 70 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU. 71 */ 72 73 /** 74 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue 75 * 76 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use. 77 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by 78 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the 79 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback. 80 * 81 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during 82 * suspend. 83 * 84 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock. 85 * 86 */ 87 88 /** 89 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing 90 * 91 * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed 92 * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness 93 * between different stations/interfaces. 94 * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead 95 * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx(). 96 * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx(). 97 * 98 * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue 99 * driver operation. 100 * 101 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with 102 * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and 103 * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames. 104 * 105 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations 106 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops. 107 * 108 * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame from a 109 * txq, it calls ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a 110 * queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op. 111 * 112 * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to 113 * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to 114 * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls 115 * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using 116 * ieee80211_return_txq(). 117 * 118 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has 119 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling 120 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq 121 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls 122 * .release_buffered_frames(). 123 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own 124 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained 125 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue). 126 */ 127 128 struct device; 129 130 /** 131 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues 132 * 133 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues. 134 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set 135 */ 136 enum ieee80211_max_queues { 137 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16, 138 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1, 139 }; 140 141 #define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff 142 143 /** 144 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211 145 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice 146 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video 147 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort 148 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background 149 */ 150 enum ieee80211_ac_numbers { 151 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0, 152 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1, 153 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2, 154 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3, 155 }; 156 157 /** 158 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration 159 * 160 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS 161 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29. 162 * 163 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255] 164 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form 165 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767] 166 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min] 167 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled 168 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category 169 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue 170 * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured 171 * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE 172 */ 173 struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params { 174 u16 txop; 175 u16 cw_min; 176 u16 cw_max; 177 u8 aifs; 178 bool acm; 179 bool uapsd; 180 bool mu_edca; 181 struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec; 182 }; 183 184 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats { 185 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount; 186 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount; 187 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount; 188 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount; 189 }; 190 191 /** 192 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context 193 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed 194 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed 195 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed 196 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel, 197 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA 198 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed 199 */ 200 enum ieee80211_chanctx_change { 201 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0), 202 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1), 203 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2), 204 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3), 205 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4), 206 }; 207 208 /** 209 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to 210 * 211 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx 212 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only. 213 * 214 * @def: the channel definition 215 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required. 216 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be 217 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions 218 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled 219 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions; 220 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static. 221 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel. 222 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 223 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information. 224 */ 225 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf { 226 struct cfg80211_chan_def def; 227 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def; 228 229 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic; 230 231 bool radar_enabled; 232 233 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 234 }; 235 236 /** 237 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode 238 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already 239 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface 240 * needs to be switched from one to the other. 241 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop 242 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but 243 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches 244 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course 245 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing 246 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context 247 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used 248 * for changes/removal.) 249 */ 250 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode { 251 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF, 252 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS, 253 }; 254 255 /** 256 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information 257 * 258 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that 259 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The 260 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be 261 * done. 262 * 263 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx 264 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned 265 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned 266 */ 267 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch { 268 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 269 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx; 270 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx; 271 }; 272 273 /** 274 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags 275 * 276 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback 277 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed. 278 * 279 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated), 280 * also implies a change in the AID. 281 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed 282 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed 283 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed 284 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed 285 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed 286 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed 287 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever 288 * reason (IBSS and managed mode) 289 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve 290 * new beacon (beaconing modes) 291 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be 292 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes) 293 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed 294 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed 295 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed. 296 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note 297 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode. 298 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface. 299 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode) 300 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode) 301 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode) 302 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface 303 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS) 304 * changed 305 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available: 306 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration. 307 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed, 308 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel 309 * context had been assigned. 310 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed 311 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed 312 * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected 313 * keep alive) changed. 314 * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface 315 * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fine timing measurement request responder 316 * functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode). 317 * @BSS_CHANGED_TWT: TWT status changed 318 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD: OBSS Packet Detection status changed. 319 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR: BSS Color has changed 320 * @BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY: FILS discovery status changed. 321 * @BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP: Unsolicited broadcast probe response 322 * status changed. 323 * 324 */ 325 enum ieee80211_bss_change { 326 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0, 327 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1, 328 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2, 329 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3, 330 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4, 331 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5, 332 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6, 333 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7, 334 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8, 335 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9, 336 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10, 337 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11, 338 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12, 339 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13, 340 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14, 341 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15, 342 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16, 343 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17, 344 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18, 345 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19, 346 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20, 347 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21, 348 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22, 349 BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS = 1<<23, 350 BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE = 1<<24, 351 BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE = 1<<25, 352 BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER = 1<<26, 353 BSS_CHANGED_TWT = 1<<27, 354 BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD = 1<<28, 355 BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR = 1<<29, 356 BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY = 1<<30, 357 BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP = 1<<31, 358 359 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */ 360 }; 361 362 /* 363 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number 364 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP 365 * filtering will be disabled. 366 */ 367 #define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4 368 369 /** 370 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver 371 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver. 372 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME 373 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received 374 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because 375 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only 376 * once each time the timeout triggers. 377 */ 378 enum ieee80211_event_type { 379 RSSI_EVENT, 380 MLME_EVENT, 381 BAR_RX_EVENT, 382 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT, 383 }; 384 385 /** 386 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT 387 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver. 388 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver. 389 */ 390 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data { 391 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH, 392 RSSI_EVENT_LOW, 393 }; 394 395 /** 396 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT 397 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data 398 */ 399 struct ieee80211_rssi_event { 400 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data; 401 }; 402 403 /** 404 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT 405 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication 406 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association 407 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received.. 408 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent. 409 */ 410 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data { 411 AUTH_EVENT, 412 ASSOC_EVENT, 413 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT, 414 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT, 415 }; 416 417 /** 418 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT 419 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully. 420 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer. 421 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out. 422 */ 423 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status { 424 MLME_SUCCESS, 425 MLME_DENIED, 426 MLME_TIMEOUT, 427 }; 428 429 /** 430 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT 431 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data 432 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status 433 * @reason: the reason code if applicable 434 */ 435 struct ieee80211_mlme_event { 436 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data; 437 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status; 438 u16 reason; 439 }; 440 441 /** 442 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events 443 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates 444 * @tid: the tid 445 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT) 446 */ 447 struct ieee80211_ba_event { 448 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 449 u16 tid; 450 u16 ssn; 451 }; 452 453 /** 454 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver 455 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type. 456 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT 457 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT 458 * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT 459 * @u:union holding the fields above 460 */ 461 struct ieee80211_event { 462 enum ieee80211_event_type type; 463 union { 464 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi; 465 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme; 466 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba; 467 } u; 468 }; 469 470 /** 471 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data 472 * 473 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO 474 * 475 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group 476 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group 477 */ 478 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data { 479 u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN]; 480 u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN]; 481 }; 482 483 /** 484 * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters 485 * 486 * @lci: LCI subelement content 487 * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content 488 * @lci_len: LCI data length 489 * @civicloc_len: Civic data length 490 */ 491 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params { 492 const u8 *lci; 493 const u8 *civicloc; 494 size_t lci_len; 495 size_t civicloc_len; 496 }; 497 498 /** 499 * struct ieee80211_fils_discovery - FILS discovery parameters from 500 * IEEE Std 802.11ai-2016, Annex C.3 MIB detail. 501 * 502 * @min_interval: Minimum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000) 503 * @max_interval: Maximum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000) 504 */ 505 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery { 506 u32 min_interval; 507 u32 max_interval; 508 }; 509 510 /** 511 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters 512 * 513 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association 514 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS. 515 * 516 * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE 517 * @multi_sta_back_32bit: supports BA bitmap of 32-bits in Multi-STA BACK 518 * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP 519 * @ack_enabled: indicates support to receive a multi-TID that solicits either 520 * ACK, BACK or both 521 * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field 522 * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us 523 * @he_support: does this BSS support HE 524 * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed 525 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role) 526 * @twt_responder: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed 527 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role) 528 * @twt_protected: does this BSS support protected TWT frames 529 * @assoc: association status 530 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS 531 * or not 532 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created 533 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true 534 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection 535 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble 536 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP) 537 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing, 538 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified 539 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then. 540 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old 541 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the 542 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can 543 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after 544 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the 545 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice. 546 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf, 547 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation 548 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice. 549 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY 550 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts. 551 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync 552 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently 553 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks. 554 * @beacon_int: beacon interval 555 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp 556 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an 557 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in 558 * the current band. 559 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate 560 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled) 561 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS 562 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not 563 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be 564 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example. 565 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data 566 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation. 567 * This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel. 568 * Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must 569 * be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT. 570 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value 571 * implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should 572 * cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in 573 * relation to the newly configured threshold. 574 * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value 575 * implies disabled. This is an alternative mechanism to the single 576 * threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it. 577 * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold. 578 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis 579 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The 580 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here. 581 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here 582 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass. 583 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this 584 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list 585 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case. 586 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS. 587 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the 588 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what 589 * your driver/device needs to do. 590 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by 591 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations. 592 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode. 593 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid. 594 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode. 595 * @txpower: TX power in dBm. INT_MIN means not configured. 596 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit 597 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular 598 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is 599 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from 600 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to 601 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace) 602 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave 603 * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed 604 * to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS 605 * if it has associated clients without P2P PS support. 606 * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from 607 * transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated. 608 * In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include 609 * a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element. 610 * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN 611 * protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the 612 * station. 613 * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM 614 * responder functionality. 615 * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder. 616 * @nontransmitted: this BSS is a nontransmitted BSS profile 617 * @transmitter_bssid: the address of transmitter AP 618 * @bssid_index: index inside the multiple BSSID set 619 * @bssid_indicator: 2^bssid_indicator is the maximum number of APs in set 620 * @ema_ap: AP supports enhancements of discovery and advertisement of 621 * nontransmitted BSSIDs 622 * @profile_periodicity: the least number of beacon frames need to be received 623 * in order to discover all the nontransmitted BSSIDs in the set. 624 * @he_oper: HE operation information of the AP we are connected to 625 * @he_obss_pd: OBSS Packet Detection parameters. 626 * @he_bss_color: BSS coloring settings, if BSS supports HE 627 * @fils_discovery: FILS discovery configuration 628 * @unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval: Unsolicited broadcast probe response 629 * interval. 630 * @s1g: BSS is S1G BSS (affects Association Request format). 631 */ 632 struct ieee80211_bss_conf { 633 const u8 *bssid; 634 u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext; 635 bool multi_sta_back_32bit; 636 bool uora_exists; 637 bool ack_enabled; 638 u8 uora_ocw_range; 639 u16 frame_time_rts_th; 640 bool he_support; 641 bool twt_requester; 642 bool twt_responder; 643 bool twt_protected; 644 /* association related data */ 645 bool assoc, ibss_joined; 646 bool ibss_creator; 647 u16 aid; 648 /* erp related data */ 649 bool use_cts_prot; 650 bool use_short_preamble; 651 bool use_short_slot; 652 bool enable_beacon; 653 u8 dtim_period; 654 u16 beacon_int; 655 u16 assoc_capability; 656 u64 sync_tsf; 657 u32 sync_device_ts; 658 u8 sync_dtim_count; 659 u32 basic_rates; 660 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate; 661 int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 662 u16 ht_operation_mode; 663 s32 cqm_rssi_thold; 664 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst; 665 s32 cqm_rssi_low; 666 s32 cqm_rssi_high; 667 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef; 668 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group; 669 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN]; 670 int arp_addr_cnt; 671 bool qos; 672 bool idle; 673 bool ps; 674 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN]; 675 size_t ssid_len; 676 bool hidden_ssid; 677 int txpower; 678 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type; 679 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr; 680 bool allow_p2p_go_ps; 681 u16 max_idle_period; 682 bool protected_keep_alive; 683 bool ftm_responder; 684 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params; 685 /* Multiple BSSID data */ 686 bool nontransmitted; 687 u8 transmitter_bssid[ETH_ALEN]; 688 u8 bssid_index; 689 u8 bssid_indicator; 690 bool ema_ap; 691 u8 profile_periodicity; 692 struct { 693 u32 params; 694 u16 nss_set; 695 } he_oper; 696 struct ieee80211_he_obss_pd he_obss_pd; 697 struct cfg80211_he_bss_color he_bss_color; 698 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery fils_discovery; 699 u32 unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval; 700 bool s1g; 701 }; 702 703 /** 704 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status 705 * 706 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info. 707 * 708 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame. 709 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence 710 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment 711 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the 712 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly 713 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly 714 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from 715 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing. 716 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to 717 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE 718 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for 719 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field. 720 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack 721 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination 722 * station 723 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame 724 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon 725 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU 726 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211. 727 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted 728 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to 729 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or 730 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station 731 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on 732 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for 733 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above), 734 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the 735 * hardware queue. 736 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged 737 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status 738 * is for the whole aggregation. 739 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned, 740 * so consider using block ack request (BAR). 741 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be 742 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will 743 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment) 744 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate 745 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for 746 * off-channel operation. 747 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP: This frame uses hardware encapsulation 748 * (header conversion) 749 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211, 750 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS 751 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211, 752 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted 753 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll 754 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must 755 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode. 756 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the 757 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used 758 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the 759 * queue gets full. 760 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted 761 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not 762 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.) 763 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME 764 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status 765 * should kick the MLME state machine. 766 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211 767 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX 768 * status to user space) 769 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame 770 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this 771 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use. 772 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on 773 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done 774 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be 775 * handled properly by the device. 776 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP 777 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow 778 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested. 779 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate. 780 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P 781 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band. 782 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period, 783 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in 784 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames 785 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for 786 * PS-Poll responses. 787 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate. 788 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when 789 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose. 790 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it 791 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for 792 * monitor injection). 793 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with 794 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without 795 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW). 796 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack 797 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK. 798 * 799 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't 800 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary. 801 */ 802 enum mac80211_tx_info_flags { 803 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0), 804 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1), 805 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2), 806 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3), 807 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4), 808 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5), 809 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6), 810 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7), 811 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8), 812 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9), 813 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10), 814 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11), 815 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12), 816 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13), 817 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP = BIT(14), 818 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15), 819 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16), 820 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17), 821 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18), 822 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19), 823 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20), 824 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21), 825 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22), 826 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24), 827 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25), 828 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26), 829 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27), 830 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28), 831 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29), 832 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30), 833 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31), 834 }; 835 836 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23 837 838 #define IEEE80211_TX_RC_S1G_MCS IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS 839 840 /** 841 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control 842 * 843 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control 844 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP) 845 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll 846 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD). 847 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information 848 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame 849 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path 850 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP: This frame skips mesh path lookup 851 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211, 852 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before 853 * it can be sent out. 854 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO: Do not overwrite the sequence number that 855 * has already been assigned to this frame. 856 * 857 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags. 858 */ 859 enum mac80211_tx_control_flags { 860 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0), 861 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1), 862 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT = BIT(2), 863 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU = BIT(3), 864 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT = BIT(4), 865 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP = BIT(5), 866 IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(6), 867 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO = BIT(7), 868 }; 869 870 /* 871 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are 872 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack. 873 */ 874 #define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \ 875 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \ 876 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \ 877 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \ 878 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \ 879 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \ 880 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \ 881 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP) 882 883 /** 884 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the 885 * Rate Control algorithm. 886 * 887 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx, 888 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate. 889 * 890 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate. 891 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required. 892 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection. 893 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble. 894 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate. 895 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split 896 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number) 897 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in 898 * Greenfield mode. 899 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz. 900 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission 901 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission 902 * (80+80 isn't supported yet) 903 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the 904 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is 905 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS. 906 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate. 907 */ 908 enum mac80211_rate_control_flags { 909 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0), 910 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1), 911 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2), 912 913 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */ 914 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3), 915 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4), 916 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5), 917 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6), 918 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7), 919 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8), 920 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9), 921 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10), 922 }; 923 924 925 /* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */ 926 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40 927 928 /* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */ 929 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24 930 931 /* maximum number of rate stages */ 932 #define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4 933 934 /* maximum number of rate table entries */ 935 #define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4 936 937 /** 938 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status 939 * 940 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with 941 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags) 942 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate 943 * 944 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used 945 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried. 946 * 947 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should 948 * always report the rate along with the flags it used. 949 * 950 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs 951 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate 952 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example, 953 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the 954 * information:: 955 * 956 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 } 957 * 958 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted 959 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four 960 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets 961 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status 962 * information should then contain:: 963 * 964 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ... 965 * 966 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2 967 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement. 968 */ 969 struct ieee80211_tx_rate { 970 s8 idx; 971 u16 count:5, 972 flags:11; 973 } __packed; 974 975 #define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31 976 977 static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate, 978 u8 mcs, u8 nss) 979 { 980 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF); 981 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7); 982 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs; 983 } 984 985 static inline u8 986 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate) 987 { 988 return rate->idx & 0xF; 989 } 990 991 static inline u8 992 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate) 993 { 994 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1; 995 } 996 997 /** 998 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information 999 * 1000 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses: 1001 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do 1002 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable) 1003 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened 1004 * 1005 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above 1006 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races) 1007 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC 1008 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally 1009 * @tx_time_est: TX time estimate in units of 4us, used internally 1010 * @control: union part for control data 1011 * @control.rates: TX rates array to try 1012 * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS 1013 * @control.use_rts: use RTS 1014 * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS 1015 * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only) 1016 * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table 1017 * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients 1018 * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL) 1019 * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL) 1020 * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags 1021 * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs) 1022 * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space 1023 * @pad: padding 1024 * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates 1025 * @status: union part for status data 1026 * @status.rates: attempted rates 1027 * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal 1028 * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length 1029 * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length 1030 * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy) 1031 * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission; note this is only 1032 * used for WMM AC, not for airtime fairness 1033 * @status.is_valid_ack_signal: ACK signal is valid 1034 * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area 1035 * @ack: union part for pure ACK data 1036 * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK 1037 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers 1038 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames. 1039 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set. 1040 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames. 1041 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set. 1042 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame 1043 */ 1044 struct ieee80211_tx_info { 1045 /* common information */ 1046 u32 flags; 1047 u32 band:3, 1048 ack_frame_id:13, 1049 hw_queue:4, 1050 tx_time_est:10; 1051 /* 2 free bits */ 1052 1053 union { 1054 struct { 1055 union { 1056 /* rate control */ 1057 struct { 1058 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[ 1059 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1060 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx; 1061 u8 use_rts:1; 1062 u8 use_cts_prot:1; 1063 u8 short_preamble:1; 1064 u8 skip_table:1; 1065 /* 2 bytes free */ 1066 }; 1067 /* only needed before rate control */ 1068 unsigned long jiffies; 1069 }; 1070 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */ 1071 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 1072 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key; 1073 u32 flags; 1074 codel_time_t enqueue_time; 1075 } control; 1076 struct { 1077 u64 cookie; 1078 } ack; 1079 struct { 1080 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1081 s32 ack_signal; 1082 u8 ampdu_ack_len; 1083 u8 ampdu_len; 1084 u8 antenna; 1085 u16 tx_time; 1086 bool is_valid_ack_signal; 1087 void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)]; 1088 } status; 1089 struct { 1090 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[ 1091 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1092 u8 pad[4]; 1093 1094 void *rate_driver_data[ 1095 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)]; 1096 }; 1097 void *driver_data[ 1098 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)]; 1099 }; 1100 }; 1101 1102 static inline u16 1103 ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, u16 tx_time_est) 1104 { 1105 /* We only have 10 bits in tx_time_est, so store airtime 1106 * in increments of 4us and clamp the maximum to 2**12-1 1107 */ 1108 info->tx_time_est = min_t(u16, tx_time_est, 4095) >> 2; 1109 return info->tx_time_est << 2; 1110 } 1111 1112 static inline u16 1113 ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 1114 { 1115 return info->tx_time_est << 2; 1116 } 1117 1118 /** 1119 * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx status info for rate control 1120 * 1121 * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for 1122 * @info: Basic tx status information 1123 * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver) 1124 * @rate: The TX rate that was used when sending the packet 1125 * @free_list: list where processed skbs are stored to be free'd by the driver 1126 */ 1127 struct ieee80211_tx_status { 1128 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 1129 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info; 1130 struct sk_buff *skb; 1131 struct rate_info *rate; 1132 struct list_head *free_list; 1133 }; 1134 1135 /** 1136 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs 1137 * 1138 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan 1139 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace 1140 * and the ones generated by mac80211. 1141 * 1142 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs. 1143 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs. 1144 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones) 1145 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies 1146 */ 1147 struct ieee80211_scan_ies { 1148 const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 1149 size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 1150 const u8 *common_ies; 1151 size_t common_ie_len; 1152 }; 1153 1154 1155 static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb) 1156 { 1157 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb; 1158 } 1159 1160 static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb) 1161 { 1162 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb; 1163 } 1164 1165 /** 1166 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status 1167 * 1168 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared. 1169 * 1170 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report 1171 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything 1172 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear 1173 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway). 1174 * 1175 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use 1176 * info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data 1177 * instead if you need only the less space that allows. 1178 */ 1179 static inline void 1180 ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 1181 { 1182 int i; 1183 1184 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 1185 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates)); 1186 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 1187 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates)); 1188 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8); 1189 /* clear the rate counts */ 1190 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++) 1191 info->status.rates[i].count = 0; 1192 1193 BUILD_BUG_ON( 1194 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20); 1195 memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0, 1196 sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) - 1197 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len)); 1198 } 1199 1200 1201 /** 1202 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags 1203 * 1204 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status. 1205 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame. 1206 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED. 1207 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware. 1208 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame, 1209 * verification has been done by the hardware. 1210 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame. 1211 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection 1212 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that. 1213 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this 1214 * flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection. 1215 * Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame 1216 * is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set) 1217 * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did 1218 * de-duplication by itself. 1219 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on 1220 * the frame. 1221 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on 1222 * the frame. 1223 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1224 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU 1225 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS 1226 * merging. 1227 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1228 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU 1229 * (including FCS) was received. 1230 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1231 * field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received. 1232 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present. 1233 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU) 1234 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference 1235 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for 1236 * each A-MPDU 1237 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all 1238 * subframes of a single A-MPDU 1239 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU 1240 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected 1241 * on this subframe 1242 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC 1243 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field) 1244 * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was 1245 * done by the hardware 1246 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without 1247 * processing it in any regular way. 1248 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report 1249 * them for sniffing purposes. 1250 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except 1251 * monitor interfaces. 1252 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report 1253 * them for sniffing purposes. 1254 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU 1255 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons. 1256 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g. 1257 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while 1258 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to 1259 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU 1260 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be 1261 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be 1262 * interleaved with other frames. 1263 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific 1264 * radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by 1265 * the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap. 1266 * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before. 1267 * This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as 1268 * the first subframe. 1269 * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must 1270 * be done in the hardware. 1271 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this 1272 * frame 1273 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known 1274 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present 1275 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in 1276 * 1277 * - DATA3_DATA_MCS 1278 * - DATA3_DATA_DCM 1279 * - DATA3_CODING 1280 * - DATA5_GI 1281 * - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC 1282 * - DATA6_NSTS 1283 * - DATA3_STBC 1284 * 1285 * from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data) 1286 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present 1287 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu) 1288 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present 1289 * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with 1290 * the "0-length PSDU" field included there. The value for it is 1291 * in &struct ieee80211_rx_status. Note that if this value isn't 1292 * known the frame shouldn't be reported. 1293 */ 1294 enum mac80211_rx_flags { 1295 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0), 1296 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1), 1297 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START = BIT(2), 1298 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3), 1299 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4), 1300 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5), 1301 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6), 1302 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7), 1303 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(8), 1304 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(9), 1305 RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED = BIT(10), 1306 RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED = BIT(11), 1307 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(12), 1308 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(13), 1309 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(14), 1310 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(15), 1311 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(16), 1312 RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR = BIT(17), 1313 RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR = BIT(18), 1314 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(19), 1315 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA = BIT(20), 1316 RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED = BIT(21), 1317 RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN = BIT(22), 1318 RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED = BIT(23), 1319 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT = BIT(24), 1320 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN = BIT(25), 1321 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE = BIT(26), 1322 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU = BIT(27), 1323 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG = BIT(28), 1324 RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU = BIT(29), 1325 }; 1326 1327 /** 1328 * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags 1329 * 1330 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame 1331 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used 1332 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission, 1333 * if the driver fills this value it should add 1334 * %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT 1335 * to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact. 1336 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used 1337 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3 1338 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed 1339 */ 1340 enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags { 1341 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(0), 1342 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(2), 1343 RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(3), 1344 RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(4) | BIT(5), 1345 RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(6), 1346 RX_ENC_FLAG_BF = BIT(7), 1347 }; 1348 1349 #define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 4 1350 1351 enum mac80211_rx_encoding { 1352 RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0, 1353 RX_ENC_HT, 1354 RX_ENC_VHT, 1355 RX_ENC_HE, 1356 }; 1357 1358 /** 1359 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status 1360 * 1361 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset 1362 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received 1363 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb). 1364 * 1365 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function 1366 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware. 1367 * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is 1368 * needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache. 1369 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use 1370 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation 1371 * @band: the active band when this frame was received 1372 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz 1373 * This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed 1374 * for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting. 1375 * @freq_offset: @freq has a positive offset of 500Khz. 1376 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or 1377 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags 1378 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_* 1379 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength 1380 * values were filled. 1381 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't 1382 * support dB or unspecified units) 1383 * @antenna: antenna used 1384 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if 1385 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT) 1386 * @nss: number of streams (VHT and HE only) 1387 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\* 1388 * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding 1389 * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw 1390 * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags 1391 * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc 1392 * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi 1393 * @he_dcm: HE DCM value 1394 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211 1395 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for 1396 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU 1397 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC 1398 * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU 1399 */ 1400 struct ieee80211_rx_status { 1401 u64 mactime; 1402 u64 boottime_ns; 1403 u32 device_timestamp; 1404 u32 ampdu_reference; 1405 u32 flag; 1406 u16 freq: 13, freq_offset: 1; 1407 u8 enc_flags; 1408 u8 encoding:2, bw:3, he_ru:3; 1409 u8 he_gi:2, he_dcm:1; 1410 u8 rate_idx; 1411 u8 nss; 1412 u8 rx_flags; 1413 u8 band; 1414 u8 antenna; 1415 s8 signal; 1416 u8 chains; 1417 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS]; 1418 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc; 1419 u8 zero_length_psdu_type; 1420 }; 1421 1422 static inline u32 1423 ieee80211_rx_status_to_khz(struct ieee80211_rx_status *rx_status) 1424 { 1425 return MHZ_TO_KHZ(rx_status->freq) + 1426 (rx_status->freq_offset ? 500 : 0); 1427 } 1428 1429 /** 1430 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information 1431 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace 1432 * (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more 1433 * bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that) 1434 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed 1435 * alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace 1436 * description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment) 1437 * Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1! 1438 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI 1439 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace 1440 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done 1441 * then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the 1442 * @data field. 1443 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that 1444 * the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd 1445 * length 1446 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data 1447 * 1448 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before 1449 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns 1450 * data. 1451 */ 1452 struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap { 1453 u32 present; 1454 u8 align; 1455 u8 oui[3]; 1456 u8 subns; 1457 u8 pad; 1458 u16 len; 1459 u8 data[]; 1460 } __packed; 1461 1462 /** 1463 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags 1464 * 1465 * Flags to define PHY configuration options 1466 * 1467 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this 1468 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets 1469 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags! 1470 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only). 1471 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2, 1472 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to 1473 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames. 1474 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states, 1475 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support" 1476 * for more. 1477 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set 1478 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but 1479 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will 1480 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but 1481 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active. 1482 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main 1483 * operating channel. 1484 */ 1485 enum ieee80211_conf_flags { 1486 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0), 1487 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1), 1488 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2), 1489 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3), 1490 }; 1491 1492 1493 /** 1494 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed 1495 * 1496 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed 1497 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed 1498 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed 1499 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed 1500 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed 1501 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed 1502 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed 1503 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed 1504 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used, 1505 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed. 1506 */ 1507 enum ieee80211_conf_changed { 1508 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1), 1509 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2), 1510 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3), 1511 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4), 1512 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5), 1513 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6), 1514 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7), 1515 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8), 1516 }; 1517 1518 /** 1519 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode 1520 * 1521 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic 1522 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off 1523 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static 1524 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic 1525 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use 1526 */ 1527 enum ieee80211_smps_mode { 1528 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC, 1529 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF, 1530 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC, 1531 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC, 1532 1533 /* keep last */ 1534 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES, 1535 }; 1536 1537 /** 1538 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device 1539 * 1540 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware. 1541 * 1542 * @flags: configuration flags defined above 1543 * 1544 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval 1545 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use 1546 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon 1547 * has been received and the DTIM period is known. 1548 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the 1549 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when 1550 * the CONF_PS flag is set. 1551 * 1552 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility 1553 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces 1554 * 1555 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to 1556 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled 1557 * 1558 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame 1559 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11, 1560 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries 1561 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short" 1562 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the 1563 * number of transmissions not the number of retries 1564 * 1565 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that 1566 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not 1567 * configured for an HT channel. 1568 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used, 1569 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed. 1570 */ 1571 struct ieee80211_conf { 1572 u32 flags; 1573 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout; 1574 1575 u16 listen_interval; 1576 u8 ps_dtim_period; 1577 1578 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count; 1579 1580 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef; 1581 bool radar_enabled; 1582 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode; 1583 }; 1584 1585 /** 1586 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data 1587 * 1588 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch 1589 * operation. 1590 * 1591 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization 1592 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch 1593 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter 1594 * the driver passed into mac80211. 1595 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the 1596 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211. 1597 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the 1598 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP. 1599 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to 1600 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event 1601 * @delay: maximum delay between the time the AP transmitted the last beacon in 1602 * current channel and the expected time of the first beacon in the new 1603 * channel, expressed in TU. 1604 */ 1605 struct ieee80211_channel_switch { 1606 u64 timestamp; 1607 u32 device_timestamp; 1608 bool block_tx; 1609 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef; 1610 u8 count; 1611 u32 delay; 1612 }; 1613 1614 /** 1615 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags 1616 * 1617 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering 1618 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups 1619 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality 1620 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor 1621 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and 1622 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached. 1623 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this 1624 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition, 1625 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is 1626 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces. 1627 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes 1628 * and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even 1629 * this is not pure P2P vif. 1630 */ 1631 enum ieee80211_vif_flags { 1632 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0), 1633 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1), 1634 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2), 1635 IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE = BIT(3), 1636 }; 1637 1638 1639 /** 1640 * enum ieee80211_offload_flags - virtual interface offload flags 1641 * 1642 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED: tx encapsulation offload is enabled 1643 * The driver supports sending frames passed as 802.3 frames by mac80211. 1644 * It must also support sending 802.11 packets for the same interface. 1645 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR: support 4-address mode encapsulation offload 1646 */ 1647 1648 enum ieee80211_offload_flags { 1649 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED = BIT(0), 1650 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR = BIT(1), 1651 }; 1652 1653 /** 1654 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data 1655 * 1656 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver 1657 * use during the life of a virtual interface. 1658 * 1659 * @type: type of this virtual interface 1660 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own 1661 * or the BSS we're associated to 1662 * @addr: address of this interface 1663 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p 1664 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively 1665 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is 1666 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine 1667 * for read access. 1668 * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability 1669 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface, 1670 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added 1671 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed 1672 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field 1673 * @offloaad_flags: hardware offload capabilities/flags for this interface. 1674 * These are initialized by mac80211 before calling .add_interface, 1675 * .change_interface or .update_vif_offload and updated by the driver 1676 * within these ops, based on supported features or runtime change 1677 * restrictions. 1678 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC 1679 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only 1680 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL 1681 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX 1682 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always 1683 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be 1684 * processed after it switches back to %NULL. 1685 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per 1686 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual 1687 * monitor interface (if that is requested.) 1688 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this 1689 * interface. 1690 * @rx_mcast_action_reg: multicast Action frames should be reported to mac80211 1691 * for this interface. 1692 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 1693 * sizeof(void \*). 1694 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction) 1695 * @txqs_stopped: per AC flag to indicate that intermediate TXQs are stopped, 1696 * protected by fq->lock. 1697 * @offload_flags: 802.3 -> 802.11 enapsulation offload flags, see 1698 * &enum ieee80211_offload_flags. 1699 */ 1700 struct ieee80211_vif { 1701 enum nl80211_iftype type; 1702 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf; 1703 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2); 1704 bool p2p; 1705 bool csa_active; 1706 bool mu_mimo_owner; 1707 1708 u8 cab_queue; 1709 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS]; 1710 1711 struct ieee80211_txq *txq; 1712 1713 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf; 1714 1715 u32 driver_flags; 1716 u32 offload_flags; 1717 1718 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS 1719 struct dentry *debugfs_dir; 1720 #endif 1721 1722 bool probe_req_reg; 1723 bool rx_mcast_action_reg; 1724 1725 bool txqs_stopped[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS]; 1726 1727 /* must be last */ 1728 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 1729 }; 1730 1731 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 1732 { 1733 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH 1734 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT; 1735 #endif 1736 return false; 1737 } 1738 1739 /** 1740 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev 1741 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for 1742 * 1743 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs 1744 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev. 1745 * 1746 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't 1747 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor 1748 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.) 1749 */ 1750 struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev); 1751 1752 /** 1753 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif 1754 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for 1755 * 1756 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs 1757 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif. 1758 * 1759 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't 1760 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor 1761 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.) 1762 */ 1763 struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 1764 1765 /** 1766 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags 1767 * 1768 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver 1769 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf. 1770 * 1771 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the 1772 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this 1773 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs 1774 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC. 1775 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by 1776 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC 1777 * generation in software. 1778 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates 1779 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key. 1780 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a 1781 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames 1782 * (MFP) to be done in software. 1783 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver 1784 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV 1785 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with 1786 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does 1787 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or 1788 * MIC. 1789 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received 1790 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware 1791 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames 1792 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and 1793 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with 1794 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the 1795 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW. 1796 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the 1797 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation 1798 * only for management frames (MFP). 1799 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the 1800 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always 1801 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled. 1802 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for 1803 * a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with 1804 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key. 1805 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX: Key needs explicit Tx activation. 1806 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE: This flag should be set by the driver 1807 * for a AES_CMAC key to indicate that it requires sequence number 1808 * generation only 1809 */ 1810 enum ieee80211_key_flags { 1811 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0), 1812 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1), 1813 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2), 1814 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3), 1815 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4), 1816 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5), 1817 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6), 1818 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7), 1819 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE = BIT(8), 1820 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX = BIT(9), 1821 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE = BIT(10), 1822 }; 1823 1824 /** 1825 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information 1826 * 1827 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by 1828 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops. 1829 * 1830 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver 1831 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be 1832 * encrypted in hardware. 1833 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector. 1834 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it 1835 * needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO) 1836 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags. 1837 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3) 1838 * @keylen: key material length 1839 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte) 1840 * data block: 1841 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits) 1842 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits) 1843 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits) 1844 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type 1845 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type 1846 */ 1847 struct ieee80211_key_conf { 1848 atomic64_t tx_pn; 1849 u32 cipher; 1850 u8 icv_len; 1851 u8 iv_len; 1852 u8 hw_key_idx; 1853 s8 keyidx; 1854 u16 flags; 1855 u8 keylen; 1856 u8 key[]; 1857 }; 1858 1859 #define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16 1860 1861 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff)) 1862 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff)) 1863 1864 /** 1865 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter 1866 * 1867 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order 1868 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 1869 * reverse order than in packet) 1870 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 1871 * reverse order than in packet) 1872 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 1873 * reverse order than in packet) 1874 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 1875 * reverse order than in packet) 1876 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys 1877 */ 1878 struct ieee80211_key_seq { 1879 union { 1880 struct { 1881 u32 iv32; 1882 u16 iv16; 1883 } tkip; 1884 struct { 1885 u8 pn[6]; 1886 } ccmp; 1887 struct { 1888 u8 pn[6]; 1889 } aes_cmac; 1890 struct { 1891 u8 pn[6]; 1892 } aes_gmac; 1893 struct { 1894 u8 pn[6]; 1895 } gcmp; 1896 struct { 1897 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN]; 1898 u8 seq_len; 1899 } hw; 1900 }; 1901 }; 1902 1903 /** 1904 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme 1905 * 1906 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining 1907 * the secure packet crypto handling. 1908 * 1909 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector 1910 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage 1911 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher 1912 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header 1913 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header 1914 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header 1915 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits 1916 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx 1917 * key_idx value calculation: 1918 * (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift 1919 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes 1920 */ 1921 struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme { 1922 u32 cipher; 1923 u16 iftype; 1924 u8 hdr_len; 1925 u8 pn_len; 1926 u8 pn_off; 1927 u8 key_idx_off; 1928 u8 key_idx_mask; 1929 u8 key_idx_shift; 1930 u8 mic_len; 1931 }; 1932 1933 /** 1934 * enum set_key_cmd - key command 1935 * 1936 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this 1937 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added. 1938 * 1939 * @SET_KEY: a key is set 1940 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled 1941 */ 1942 enum set_key_cmd { 1943 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY, 1944 }; 1945 1946 /** 1947 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state 1948 * 1949 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all, 1950 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions 1951 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state 1952 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated 1953 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated 1954 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X) 1955 */ 1956 enum ieee80211_sta_state { 1957 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */ 1958 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST, 1959 IEEE80211_STA_NONE, 1960 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH, 1961 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC, 1962 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED, 1963 }; 1964 1965 /** 1966 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth 1967 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz 1968 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz 1969 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz 1970 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz 1971 * (including 80+80 MHz) 1972 * 1973 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized 1974 * correctly, the values must be sorted. 1975 */ 1976 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth { 1977 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0, 1978 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40, 1979 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80, 1980 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160, 1981 }; 1982 1983 /** 1984 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table 1985 * 1986 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update 1987 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default. 1988 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control. 1989 */ 1990 struct ieee80211_sta_rates { 1991 struct rcu_head rcu_head; 1992 struct { 1993 s8 idx; 1994 u8 count; 1995 u8 count_cts; 1996 u8 count_rts; 1997 u16 flags; 1998 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE]; 1999 }; 2000 2001 /** 2002 * struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr - station txpower configuration 2003 * 2004 * Used to configure txpower for station. 2005 * 2006 * @power: indicates the tx power, in dBm, to be used when sending data frames 2007 * to the STA. 2008 * @type: In particular if TPC %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED then tx power 2009 * will be less than or equal to specified from userspace, whereas if TPC 2010 * %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC then it indicates default tx power. 2011 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED is not a valid configuration option for 2012 * per peer TPC. 2013 */ 2014 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr { 2015 s16 power; 2016 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type; 2017 }; 2018 2019 /** 2020 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry 2021 * 2022 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly 2023 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in 2024 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must 2025 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly, 2026 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a 2027 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it. 2028 * 2029 * @addr: MAC address 2030 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP 2031 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band) 2032 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities 2033 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities 2034 * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA 2035 * @he_6ghz_capa: on 6 GHz, holds the HE 6 GHz band capabilities 2036 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU 2037 * that this station is allowed to transmit to us. 2038 * Can be modified by driver. 2039 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does, 2040 * otherwise always false) 2041 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 2042 * sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information. 2043 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid 2044 * if wme is supported. The bits order is like in 2045 * IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*. 2046 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported. 2047 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with 2048 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the 2049 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode 2050 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after 2051 * the station moves to associated state. 2052 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic) 2053 * @rates: rate control selection table 2054 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer 2055 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only 2056 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place. 2057 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not. 2058 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single 2059 * A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means 2060 * unlimited. 2061 * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not. 2062 * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control. 2063 * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID 2064 * @txpwr: the station tx power configuration 2065 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction); note that 2066 * the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) is used for non-data frames 2067 */ 2068 struct ieee80211_sta { 2069 u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 2070 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN]; 2071 u16 aid; 2072 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap; 2073 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap; 2074 struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap; 2075 struct ieee80211_he_6ghz_capa he_6ghz_capa; 2076 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes; 2077 bool wme; 2078 u8 uapsd_queues; 2079 u8 max_sp; 2080 u8 rx_nss; 2081 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth; 2082 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode; 2083 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates; 2084 bool tdls; 2085 bool tdls_initiator; 2086 bool mfp; 2087 u8 max_amsdu_subframes; 2088 2089 /** 2090 * @max_amsdu_len: 2091 * indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes. 2092 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble. 2093 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply: 2094 * 2095 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the 2096 * A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes. 2097 * * If the skb is not part of a BA agreement, the A-MSDU maximal 2098 * size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes. 2099 * 2100 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level 2101 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section 2102 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2). 2103 */ 2104 u16 max_amsdu_len; 2105 bool support_p2p_ps; 2106 u16 max_rc_amsdu_len; 2107 u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS]; 2108 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr txpwr; 2109 2110 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1]; 2111 2112 /* must be last */ 2113 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 2114 }; 2115 2116 /** 2117 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command 2118 * 2119 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this 2120 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition. 2121 * 2122 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping 2123 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up 2124 */ 2125 enum sta_notify_cmd { 2126 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE, 2127 }; 2128 2129 /** 2130 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data 2131 * 2132 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and 2133 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU. 2134 */ 2135 struct ieee80211_tx_control { 2136 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2137 }; 2138 2139 /** 2140 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue 2141 * 2142 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 2143 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue 2144 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue), 2145 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled) 2146 * @ac: the AC for this queue 2147 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size 2148 * 2149 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling 2150 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). 2151 */ 2152 struct ieee80211_txq { 2153 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 2154 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2155 u8 tid; 2156 u8 ac; 2157 2158 /* must be last */ 2159 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 2160 }; 2161 2162 /** 2163 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags 2164 * 2165 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to 2166 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning 2167 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting 2168 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule, 2169 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully. 2170 * 2171 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL: 2172 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be 2173 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm 2174 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace 2175 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control 2176 * algorithm. 2177 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of 2178 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have 2179 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config 2180 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot 2181 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for 2182 * CCK frames. 2183 * 2184 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS: 2185 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include 2186 * the FCS at the end. 2187 * 2188 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING: 2189 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames 2190 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others 2191 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used 2192 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and 2193 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that 2194 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(). 2195 * 2196 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC: 2197 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We 2198 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal. 2199 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead. 2200 * 2201 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM: 2202 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from 2203 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized 2204 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set. 2205 * 2206 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT: 2207 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h 2208 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC 2209 * 2210 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION: 2211 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation. 2212 * 2213 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS: 2214 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep). 2215 * 2216 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK: 2217 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies 2218 * stack support for dynamic PS. 2219 * 2220 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS: 2221 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS. 2222 * 2223 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE: 2224 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w). 2225 * 2226 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS: 2227 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to 2228 * the stack. 2229 * 2230 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR: 2231 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including 2232 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss. 2233 * 2234 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC: 2235 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e. 2236 * dtim_period). 2237 * 2238 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports 2239 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If 2240 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not 2241 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still 2242 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag 2243 * only in that case. 2244 * 2245 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device 2246 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When 2247 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected 2248 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames. 2249 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure 2250 * the PS mode of connected stations. 2251 * 2252 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session 2253 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in 2254 * software. 2255 * 2256 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of 2257 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only 2258 * active interfaces. 2259 * 2260 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to 2261 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as 2262 * desired (and thus have them named as desired). 2263 * 2264 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the 2265 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically 2266 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if 2267 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its 2268 * supported cipher suites. 2269 * 2270 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit, 2271 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration 2272 * for frames. 2273 * 2274 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface 2275 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC) 2276 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue 2277 * control for more details. 2278 * 2279 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate 2280 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm. 2281 * 2282 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any 2283 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface 2284 * is supported. 2285 * 2286 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames 2287 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon. 2288 * 2289 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates 2290 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not 2291 * using aggregation for such frames.) 2292 * 2293 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA) 2294 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support 2295 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the 2296 * CSA frame. 2297 * 2298 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload 2299 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first. 2300 * 2301 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands 2302 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band. 2303 * 2304 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth 2305 * than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel. 2306 * 2307 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs 2308 * within A-MPDU. 2309 * 2310 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status 2311 * for sent beacons. 2312 * 2313 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each 2314 * station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified 2315 * by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station 2316 * from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time. 2317 * 2318 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the 2319 * reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in 2320 * order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session 2321 * timeout. 2322 * 2323 * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX, 2324 * which implies using per-CPU station statistics. 2325 * 2326 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated 2327 * A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support. 2328 * When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must 2329 * limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting 2330 * max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta. 2331 * 2332 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list 2333 * skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU. 2334 * 2335 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event 2336 * by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such 2337 * drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver 2338 * is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout. 2339 * 2340 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself. 2341 * The stack will not do fragmentation. 2342 * The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well. 2343 * 2344 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on 2345 * TDLS links. 2346 * 2347 * @IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP: The driver requires the 2348 * mgd_prepare_tx() callback to be called before transmission of a 2349 * deauthentication frame in case the association was completed but no 2350 * beacon was heard. This is required in multi-channel scenarios, where the 2351 * virtual interface might not be given air time for the transmission of 2352 * the frame, as it is not synced with the AP/P2P GO yet, and thus the 2353 * deauthentication frame might not be transmitted. 2354 * 2355 * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't 2356 * support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug. 2357 * 2358 * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of 2359 * course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with. 2360 * 2361 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT 2362 * extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if 2363 * the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW 2364 * but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver. 2365 * See also the documentation for that flag. 2366 * 2367 * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all 2368 * MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use 2369 * TXQs to start with. 2370 * 2371 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU 2372 * length in tx status information 2373 * 2374 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID 2375 * 2376 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID 2377 * only for HE APs. Applies if @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID is set. 2378 * 2379 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT: The card and driver is only 2380 * aggregating MPDUs with the same keyid, allowing mac80211 to keep Tx 2381 * A-MPDU sessions active while rekeying with Extended Key ID. 2382 * 2383 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports tx encapsulation 2384 * offload 2385 * 2386 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays 2387 */ 2388 enum ieee80211_hw_flags { 2389 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL, 2390 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS, 2391 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING, 2392 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC, 2393 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM, 2394 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC, 2395 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT, 2396 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION, 2397 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS, 2398 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK, 2399 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS, 2400 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE, 2401 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF, 2402 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF, 2403 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL, 2404 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT, 2405 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS, 2406 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR, 2407 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL, 2408 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK, 2409 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, 2410 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW, 2411 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE, 2412 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF, 2413 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY, 2414 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES, 2415 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA, 2416 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS, 2417 IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS, 2418 IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW, 2419 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU, 2420 IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS, 2421 IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR, 2422 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER, 2423 IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS, 2424 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU, 2425 IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST, 2426 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK, 2427 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG, 2428 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA, 2429 IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, 2430 IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP, 2431 IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ, 2432 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW, 2433 IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ, 2434 IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN, 2435 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID, 2436 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID, 2437 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT, 2438 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD, 2439 2440 /* keep last, obviously */ 2441 NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS 2442 }; 2443 2444 /** 2445 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state 2446 * 2447 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware 2448 * information for an 802.11 PHY. 2449 * 2450 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this 2451 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev 2452 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV() 2453 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported 2454 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here. 2455 * 2456 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use. 2457 * 2458 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use 2459 * along with this structure. 2460 * 2461 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags. 2462 * 2463 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb 2464 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.) 2465 * 2466 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb. 2467 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs. 2468 * 2469 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used 2470 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB 2471 * 2472 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval 2473 * that HW supports 2474 * 2475 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for 2476 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these 2477 * queues need to have configurable access parameters. 2478 * 2479 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware. 2480 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be 2481 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw(). 2482 * 2483 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2484 * within &struct ieee80211_vif. 2485 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2486 * within &struct ieee80211_sta. 2487 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2488 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf. 2489 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2490 * within @struct ieee80211_txq. 2491 * 2492 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw 2493 * can handle. 2494 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages 2495 * the hw can report back. 2496 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage 2497 * 2498 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of 2499 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver 2500 * aggregation. 2501 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the 2502 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering 2503 * it shouldn't be set. 2504 * 2505 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an 2506 * aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll 2507 * advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if 2508 * the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N 2509 * with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012). 2510 * For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used. 2511 * 2512 * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum 2513 * of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list. 2514 * 2515 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX 2516 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set) 2517 * 2518 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW 2519 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't 2520 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only 2521 * adding _BW is supported today. 2522 * 2523 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports, 2524 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH. 2525 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values. 2526 * 2527 * @radiotap_he: HE radiotap validity flags 2528 * 2529 * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the 2530 * @units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp 2531 * field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status 2532 * device_timestamp. 2533 * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a 2534 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a 2535 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value. 2536 * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the 2537 * radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set. 2538 * 2539 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created 2540 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211, 2541 * other features will be rejected during HW registration. 2542 * 2543 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate 2544 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery- 2545 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap. 2546 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means 2547 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means 2548 * neither enabled. 2549 * 2550 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may 2551 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA. 2552 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values. 2553 * 2554 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions. 2555 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions 2556 * supported by HW. 2557 * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the 2558 * device. 2559 * 2560 * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from 2561 * them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed, 2562 * unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers. 2563 * 2564 * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while 2565 * refilling deficit of each TXQ. 2566 * 2567 * @max_mtu: the max mtu could be set. 2568 */ 2569 struct ieee80211_hw { 2570 struct ieee80211_conf conf; 2571 struct wiphy *wiphy; 2572 const char *rate_control_algorithm; 2573 void *priv; 2574 unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)]; 2575 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom; 2576 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom; 2577 int vif_data_size; 2578 int sta_data_size; 2579 int chanctx_data_size; 2580 int txq_data_size; 2581 u16 queues; 2582 u16 max_listen_interval; 2583 s8 max_signal; 2584 u8 max_rates; 2585 u8 max_report_rates; 2586 u8 max_rate_tries; 2587 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes; 2588 u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes; 2589 u8 max_tx_fragments; 2590 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue; 2591 u8 radiotap_mcs_details; 2592 u16 radiotap_vht_details; 2593 struct { 2594 int units_pos; 2595 s16 accuracy; 2596 } radiotap_timestamp; 2597 netdev_features_t netdev_features; 2598 u8 uapsd_queues; 2599 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len; 2600 u8 n_cipher_schemes; 2601 const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes; 2602 u8 max_nan_de_entries; 2603 u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift; 2604 u8 weight_multiplier; 2605 u32 max_mtu; 2606 }; 2607 2608 static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2609 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg) 2610 { 2611 return test_bit(flg, hw->flags); 2612 } 2613 #define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg) 2614 2615 static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2616 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg) 2617 { 2618 return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags); 2619 } 2620 #define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg) 2621 2622 /** 2623 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request 2624 * 2625 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie) 2626 * @req: cfg80211 request. 2627 */ 2628 struct ieee80211_scan_request { 2629 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies; 2630 2631 /* Keep last */ 2632 struct cfg80211_scan_request req; 2633 }; 2634 2635 /** 2636 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters 2637 * 2638 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from 2639 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request 2640 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode 2641 * @status: channel-switch response status 2642 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received 2643 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame 2644 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame 2645 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template 2646 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb 2647 */ 2648 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params { 2649 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2650 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef; 2651 u8 action_code; 2652 u32 status; 2653 u32 timestamp; 2654 u16 switch_time; 2655 u16 switch_timeout; 2656 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb; 2657 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie; 2658 }; 2659 2660 /** 2661 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy 2662 * 2663 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query 2664 * 2665 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective 2666 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private 2667 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should 2668 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this 2669 * is already used internally by mac80211. 2670 * 2671 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy. 2672 */ 2673 struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy); 2674 2675 /** 2676 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware 2677 * 2678 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for 2679 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device 2680 */ 2681 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev) 2682 { 2683 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev); 2684 } 2685 2686 /** 2687 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware 2688 * 2689 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for 2690 * @addr: the address to set 2691 */ 2692 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr) 2693 { 2694 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN); 2695 } 2696 2697 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 2698 ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2699 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c) 2700 { 2701 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0)) 2702 return NULL; 2703 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx]; 2704 } 2705 2706 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 2707 ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2708 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c) 2709 { 2710 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0) 2711 return NULL; 2712 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx]; 2713 } 2714 2715 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 2716 ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2717 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx) 2718 { 2719 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0) 2720 return NULL; 2721 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx]; 2722 } 2723 2724 /** 2725 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb 2726 * @hw: the hardware 2727 * @skb: the skb 2728 * 2729 * Free a transmit skb. Use this function when some failure 2730 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported. 2731 */ 2732 void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb); 2733 2734 /** 2735 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration 2736 * 2737 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware 2738 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations. 2739 * 2740 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given 2741 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and 2742 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL 2743 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to 2744 * the station information for the peer for individual keys. 2745 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when 2746 * VLANs are configured for an access point. 2747 * 2748 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx 2749 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf 2750 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function. 2751 * 2752 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if 2753 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be 2754 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the 2755 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range. 2756 * 2757 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is 2758 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if 2759 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the 2760 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software. 2761 * 2762 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed. 2763 * 2764 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key 2765 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any 2766 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather 2767 * based on the receive flags. 2768 * 2769 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key 2770 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key() 2771 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate 2772 * keys. 2773 * 2774 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption 2775 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key 2776 * handler. 2777 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key. 2778 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The 2779 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did 2780 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is 2781 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this 2782 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16. 2783 * 2784 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index 2785 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required 2786 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses). 2787 * 2788 * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag 2789 * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to the following 2790 * requirements: 2791 * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to 2792 mac80211 once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been 2793 completed when also setting @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV for any key, 2794 2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued 2795 at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits), 2796 3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command 2797 encrypted with the new key and 2798 4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted. 2799 Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver. 2800 */ 2801 2802 /** 2803 * DOC: Powersave support 2804 * 2805 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations. 2806 * 2807 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself, 2808 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware 2809 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode 2810 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status. 2811 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary, 2812 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required 2813 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when 2814 * it finds traffic directed to it. 2815 * 2816 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in 2817 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused 2818 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking 2819 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it 2820 * back to sleep at appropriate times. 2821 * 2822 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the 2823 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be 2824 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame. 2825 * 2826 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also 2827 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported 2828 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and 2829 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still 2830 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle 2831 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that 2832 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that. 2833 * 2834 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the 2835 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a 2836 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to 2837 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when 2838 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle 2839 * periods. 2840 * 2841 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling 2842 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS 2843 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally, 2844 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the 2845 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support 2846 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the 2847 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value 2848 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable 2849 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS 2850 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave. 2851 * 2852 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling 2853 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the 2854 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS 2855 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To 2856 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames 2857 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled. 2858 * 2859 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with 2860 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK. 2861 */ 2862 2863 /** 2864 * DOC: Beacon filter support 2865 * 2866 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups 2867 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that 2868 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly 2869 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the 2870 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That 2871 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information 2872 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed. 2873 * 2874 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER 2875 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support 2876 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When 2877 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the 2878 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss(). 2879 * 2880 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the 2881 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call 2882 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled 2883 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future. 2884 * 2885 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing 2886 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211 2887 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense 2888 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include 2889 * 2890 * - a list of information element IDs 2891 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element 2892 * 2893 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the 2894 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense 2895 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device 2896 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all 2897 * vendor information elements. 2898 * 2899 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information 2900 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon. 2901 * 2902 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing 2903 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing 2904 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and 2905 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136, 2906 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility 2907 * it could also include some currently unused IDs. 2908 * 2909 * 2910 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the 2911 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming 2912 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of 2913 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when 2914 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above 2915 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be 2916 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement 2917 * them as the roaming algorithm requires. 2918 * 2919 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to 2920 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the 2921 * signal strength threshold checking. 2922 */ 2923 2924 /** 2925 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save 2926 * 2927 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve 2928 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism 2929 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009) 2930 * "11.2.3 SM power save". 2931 * 2932 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames 2933 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct 2934 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the 2935 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware 2936 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by 2937 * hardware flags. 2938 * 2939 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211 2940 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS 2941 * turned off otherwise. 2942 * 2943 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate 2944 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config() 2945 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to 2946 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP. 2947 */ 2948 2949 /** 2950 * DOC: Frame filtering 2951 * 2952 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper 2953 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when 2954 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption, 2955 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is 2956 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible. 2957 * 2958 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell 2959 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be 2960 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out. 2961 * 2962 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast() 2963 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list 2964 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces. 2965 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to 2966 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the 2967 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and 2968 * @total_flags with the new flag states. 2969 * 2970 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will 2971 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count 2972 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted 2973 * or dropped. 2974 * 2975 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared. 2976 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_ 2977 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore 2978 * the flag, but not clear it. 2979 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the 2980 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type 2981 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it). 2982 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware 2983 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes 2984 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them, 2985 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag. 2986 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well. 2987 */ 2988 2989 /** 2990 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients 2991 * 2992 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for 2993 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD. 2994 * There currently is no support for sAPSD. 2995 * 2996 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client 2997 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time. 2998 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but 2999 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies 3000 * the driver code. 3001 * 3002 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete 3003 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set, 3004 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for 3005 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames. 3006 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of 3007 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't 3008 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD. 3009 * 3010 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the 3011 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a 3012 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is, 3013 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is 3014 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this 3015 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to 3016 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will 3017 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The 3018 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its 3019 * @sta_notify callback. 3020 * 3021 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up, 3022 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period. 3023 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and 3024 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When 3025 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211 3026 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames 3027 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit 3028 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER 3029 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only 3030 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to 3031 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have 3032 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS. 3033 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is 3034 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer. 3035 * 3036 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by 3037 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them. 3038 * 3039 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi 3040 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up 3041 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being 3042 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong 3043 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be 3044 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to 3045 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can 3046 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it 3047 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames 3048 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again 3049 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked. 3050 * 3051 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any 3052 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is 3053 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any 3054 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up 3055 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when 3056 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service 3057 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called 3058 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are 3059 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting 3060 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames, 3061 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if 3062 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames 3063 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the 3064 * buffers for those TIDs contain. 3065 * 3066 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may 3067 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must 3068 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that 3069 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid 3070 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released 3071 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp() 3072 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway. 3073 * 3074 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211 3075 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags 3076 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP) 3077 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame. 3078 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case. 3079 * 3080 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data 3081 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as 3082 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame 3083 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed. 3084 */ 3085 3086 /** 3087 * DOC: HW queue control 3088 * 3089 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static 3090 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This 3091 * was problematic for a few reasons: 3092 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames 3093 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly 3094 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames 3095 * 3096 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all 3097 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it 3098 * won't have the same problem with the software queues. 3099 * 3100 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability 3101 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do 3102 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif 3103 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will 3104 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and 3105 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors 3106 * the hardware queue. 3107 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue 3108 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.) 3109 * 3110 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual 3111 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to 3112 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a 3113 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have 3114 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios: 3115 * 3116 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3 3117 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7 3118 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8 3119 * off-channel queue: 9 3120 * 3121 * It would then set up the hardware like this: 3122 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9 3123 * 3124 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows: 3125 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0 3126 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1 3127 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2 3128 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3 3129 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 3130 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7. 3131 * 3132 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second 3133 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC. 3134 * 3135 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 3136 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the 3137 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when 3138 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode. 3139 */ 3140 3141 /** 3142 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags 3143 * 3144 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be 3145 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the 3146 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested, 3147 * but this has negative impact on power consumption. 3148 * 3149 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested 3150 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by 3151 * multicast address. 3152 * 3153 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the 3154 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them) 3155 * 3156 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set 3157 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them 3158 * 3159 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate 3160 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses 3161 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing 3162 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should 3163 * honour this flag if possible. 3164 * 3165 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this 3166 * station 3167 * 3168 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes 3169 * 3170 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames 3171 * 3172 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames 3173 * 3174 * @FIF_MCAST_ACTION: pass multicast Action frames 3175 */ 3176 enum ieee80211_filter_flags { 3177 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1, 3178 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2, 3179 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3, 3180 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4, 3181 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5, 3182 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6, 3183 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7, 3184 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8, 3185 FIF_MCAST_ACTION = 1<<9, 3186 }; 3187 3188 /** 3189 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions 3190 * 3191 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in 3192 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed. 3193 * 3194 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation 3195 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by 3196 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer 3197 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away! 3198 * 3199 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation 3200 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation 3201 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation, the driver must either 3202 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() or 3203 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() with status 3204 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA to delay addba after 3205 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe is called, or just return the special 3206 * status %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE. 3207 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational 3208 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting 3209 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the 3210 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(). 3211 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets, 3212 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call 3213 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the 3214 * session is gone and removes the station. 3215 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped 3216 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and 3217 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers 3218 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called. 3219 */ 3220 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action { 3221 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START, 3222 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP, 3223 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START, 3224 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT, 3225 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH, 3226 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT, 3227 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL, 3228 }; 3229 3230 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE 1 3231 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA 2 3232 3233 /** 3234 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters 3235 * 3236 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. 3237 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session 3238 * @tid: tid of the BA session 3239 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When 3240 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the 3241 * actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here. 3242 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size (number of subframes). Valid only when the 3243 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or 3244 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL 3245 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU. 3246 * valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL 3247 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to 3248 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START 3249 */ 3250 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params { 3251 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action; 3252 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 3253 u16 tid; 3254 u16 ssn; 3255 u16 buf_size; 3256 bool amsdu; 3257 u16 timeout; 3258 }; 3259 3260 /** 3261 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason 3262 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll 3263 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to 3264 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC 3265 */ 3266 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type { 3267 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL, 3268 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD, 3269 }; 3270 3271 /** 3272 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed 3273 * 3274 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit 3275 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station 3276 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40 3277 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes. 3278 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed. 3279 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer 3280 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about 3281 * the peer. 3282 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed 3283 * by the peer 3284 */ 3285 enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed { 3286 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0), 3287 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1), 3288 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2), 3289 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3), 3290 }; 3291 3292 /** 3293 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type 3294 * 3295 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations, 3296 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other 3297 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vice versa). 3298 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC 3299 * operations compared to other operations/flows. 3300 * 3301 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC. 3302 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required 3303 * for sending management frames offchannel. 3304 */ 3305 enum ieee80211_roc_type { 3306 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0, 3307 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX, 3308 }; 3309 3310 /** 3311 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_complete_type - reconfig type 3312 * 3313 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what 3314 * reconfiguration type was completed. 3315 * 3316 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type 3317 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1) 3318 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless 3319 * of wowlan configuration) 3320 */ 3321 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type { 3322 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART, 3323 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND, 3324 }; 3325 3326 /** 3327 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver 3328 * 3329 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may 3330 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure 3331 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame. 3332 * 3333 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame. 3334 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header. 3335 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on 3336 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should, 3337 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately. 3338 * Must be atomic. 3339 * 3340 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware 3341 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on 3342 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.) 3343 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace, 3344 * or zero. 3345 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address 3346 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device 3347 * is added. 3348 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 3349 * 3350 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware 3351 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least 3352 * it must turn off frame reception.) 3353 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects 3354 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue 3355 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback. 3356 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 3357 * 3358 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and 3359 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then 3360 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is 3361 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and 3362 * reconfigured at resume time. 3363 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it 3364 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only 3365 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it 3366 * must return 1 from this function. 3367 * 3368 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is 3369 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully 3370 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is 3371 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211 3372 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume. 3373 * 3374 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is 3375 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is 3376 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only 3377 * in suspend(). 3378 * 3379 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is 3380 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start 3381 * and @stop must be implemented. 3382 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before 3383 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the 3384 * interface is given in the conf parameter. 3385 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a 3386 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.) 3387 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 3388 * 3389 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback 3390 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be 3391 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep. 3392 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be 3393 * found by the interface iteration callbacks. 3394 * 3395 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down. 3396 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface 3397 * and no monitor interfaces are present. 3398 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware 3399 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets, 3400 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the 3401 * MAC address of the device going away. 3402 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep. 3403 * 3404 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this 3405 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel. 3406 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code 3407 * if it does. The callback can sleep. 3408 * 3409 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS 3410 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low 3411 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters). 3412 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless 3413 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which 3414 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback 3415 * can sleep. 3416 * 3417 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration. 3418 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed 3419 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic. 3420 * 3421 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter. 3422 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information. 3423 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep. 3424 * 3425 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter. 3426 * This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames 3427 * should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination 3428 * of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates 3429 * which flags are changed. 3430 * This callback can sleep. 3431 * 3432 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit 3433 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic. 3434 * 3435 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration" 3436 * This callback is only called between add_interface and 3437 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface 3438 * is enabled. 3439 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added. 3440 * The callback can sleep. 3441 * 3442 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration" 3443 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers 3444 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY. 3445 * The callback must be atomic. 3446 * 3447 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the 3448 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data 3449 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter. 3450 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify 3451 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(). 3452 * 3453 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for 3454 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP 3455 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it. 3456 * 3457 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start 3458 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel 3459 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's 3460 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure 3461 * that power save is disabled. 3462 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the 3463 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these 3464 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the 3465 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable). 3466 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called; 3467 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to 3468 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code. 3469 * This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1, 3470 * this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a 3471 * software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this 3472 * capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't 3473 * advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is. 3474 * The callback can sleep. 3475 * 3476 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan. 3477 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible), 3478 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call 3479 * ieee80211_scan_completed(). 3480 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new 3481 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended. 3482 * The callback can sleep. 3483 * 3484 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at 3485 * specific intervals. The driver must call the 3486 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results. 3487 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called. 3488 * 3489 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan. 3490 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called. 3491 * 3492 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan 3493 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification. 3494 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR, 3495 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it 3496 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep. 3497 * 3498 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a 3499 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need 3500 * this notification. 3501 * The callback can sleep. 3502 * 3503 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics. 3504 * Returns zero if statistics are available. 3505 * The callback can sleep. 3506 * 3507 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does 3508 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the 3509 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware. 3510 * The callback must be atomic. 3511 * 3512 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this 3513 * if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the 3514 * stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG 3515 * should be set as well. 3516 * The callback can sleep. 3517 * 3518 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it) 3519 * The callback can sleep. 3520 * 3521 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station, 3522 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep. 3523 * 3524 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated 3525 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback 3526 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected; 3527 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing 3528 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed. 3529 * This callback can sleep. 3530 * 3531 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files 3532 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback 3533 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This 3534 * callback can sleep. 3535 * 3536 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an 3537 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating 3538 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag 3539 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic. 3540 * 3541 * @sta_set_txpwr: Configure the station tx power. This callback set the tx 3542 * power for the station. 3543 * This callback can sleep. 3544 * 3545 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a 3546 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.) 3547 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove. 3548 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions 3549 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it 3550 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace 3551 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station. 3552 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed. 3553 * The callback can sleep. 3554 * 3555 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU 3556 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station 3557 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear 3558 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse 3559 * in @sta_state. 3560 * The callback can sleep. 3561 * 3562 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be 3563 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits 3564 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected 3565 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver 3566 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since 3567 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly. 3568 * Must be atomic. 3569 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This 3570 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses 3571 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic. 3572 * 3573 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon 3574 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so 3575 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of 3576 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not 3577 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible. 3578 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211. 3579 * The callback can sleep. 3580 * 3581 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max), 3582 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue. 3583 * Returns a negative error code on failure. 3584 * The callback can sleep. 3585 * 3586 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently, 3587 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a 3588 * required function. 3589 * The callback can sleep. 3590 * 3591 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware. 3592 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a 3593 * required function. 3594 * The callback can sleep. 3595 * 3596 * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the 3597 * firmware/hardware. Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between 3598 * calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up 3599 * as TSF delay. Is not a required function. 3600 * The callback can sleep. 3601 * 3602 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize 3603 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This 3604 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of 3605 * TSF synchronization. 3606 * The callback can sleep. 3607 * 3608 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us. 3609 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is 3610 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests. 3611 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon. 3612 * The callback can sleep. 3613 * 3614 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information 3615 * 3616 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also 3617 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration, 3618 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback. 3619 * The callback can sleep. 3620 * 3621 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified 3622 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout 3623 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout 3624 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for 3625 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep. 3626 * 3627 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may 3628 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep. 3629 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep. 3630 * 3631 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure 3632 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap 3633 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces 3634 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues. 3635 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped. 3636 * Note that vif can be NULL. 3637 * The callback can sleep. 3638 * 3639 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel 3640 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this 3641 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate 3642 * completion of the channel switch. 3643 * 3644 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device. 3645 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may 3646 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL 3647 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX). 3648 * 3649 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant). 3650 * 3651 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must 3652 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note 3653 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw 3654 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted 3655 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the 3656 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call 3657 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(). 3658 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and 3659 * must be accepted in this case. 3660 * This callback may sleep. 3661 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is 3662 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep. 3663 * 3664 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes. 3665 * 3666 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes. 3667 * 3668 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware 3669 * queues before entering power save. 3670 * 3671 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection 3672 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled. 3673 * The callback can sleep. 3674 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See 3675 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types. 3676 * The callback must be atomic. 3677 * 3678 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given 3679 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for 3680 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver 3681 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD. 3682 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check 3683 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than 3684 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in 3685 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the 3686 * more-data bit must always be set. 3687 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames 3688 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set. 3689 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the 3690 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In 3691 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag 3692 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll 3693 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple 3694 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame. 3695 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be 3696 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send 3697 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for 3698 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the 3699 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP 3700 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function 3701 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP. 3702 * This callback must be atomic. 3703 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames 3704 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211 3705 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames 3706 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set 3707 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case 3708 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder 3709 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag 3710 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP 3711 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the 3712 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function. 3713 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the 3714 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set. 3715 * This callback must be atomic. 3716 * 3717 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count. 3718 * 3719 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats. 3720 * 3721 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats 3722 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets. 3723 * 3724 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association 3725 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is 3726 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated 3727 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any 3728 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's 3729 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a 3730 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the 3731 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response 3732 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO. 3733 * For drivers that set %IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, mac80211 3734 * would also call this function before transmitting a deauthentication 3735 * frame in case that no beacon was heard from the AP/P2P GO. 3736 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return 3737 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away. 3738 * If duration is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the driver the 3739 * duration for which the operation is requested. 3740 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep. 3741 * 3742 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending 3743 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's 3744 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS 3745 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP. 3746 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS 3747 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least 3748 * 2 * (DTIM period). 3749 * The callback is optional and can sleep. 3750 * 3751 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation. 3752 * This callback may sleep. 3753 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction. 3754 * This callback may sleep. 3755 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that 3756 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same 3757 * channel context with different settings 3758 * This callback may sleep. 3759 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound 3760 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping. 3761 * This callback may sleep. 3762 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being 3763 * unbound from vif. 3764 * This callback may sleep. 3765 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to 3766 * another, as specified in the list of 3767 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according 3768 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode. 3769 * This callback may sleep. 3770 * 3771 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the 3772 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel 3773 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses 3774 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is 3775 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being 3776 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed. 3777 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface. 3778 * 3779 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and 3780 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed. 3781 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and 3782 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames). 3783 * This callback may sleep. 3784 * 3785 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed. 3786 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces. 3787 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep. 3788 * 3789 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel. 3790 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this 3791 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be 3792 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call 3793 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get() 3794 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is 3795 * 1 using ieee80211_beacon_counter_is_complete() after the beacon has been 3796 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish(). 3797 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called, 3798 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway. 3799 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 3800 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA 3801 * gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing 3802 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch. 3803 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 3804 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the 3805 * driver to go back to a normal configuration. 3806 * @abort_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 3807 * when channel switch procedure was completed, allowing the 3808 * driver to go back to a normal configuration. 3809 * @channel_switch_rx_beacon: This is an optional callback that is called 3810 * when channel switch procedure is in progress and additional beacon with 3811 * CSA IE was received, allowing driver to track changes in count. 3812 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all 3813 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A 3814 * channel context is bound before this is called. 3815 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again. 3816 * 3817 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the 3818 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0 3819 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide. 3820 * 3821 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration 3822 * and hardware limits. 3823 * 3824 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver 3825 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations 3826 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The 3827 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of 3828 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation. 3829 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can 3830 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use. 3831 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both 3832 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes. 3833 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or 3834 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets 3835 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue 3836 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch 3837 * response template is provided, together with the location of the 3838 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within 3839 * the function call. 3840 * 3841 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue. 3842 * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a 3843 * synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues 3844 * pending frames that were received prior to the control path action 3845 * currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet. 3846 * 3847 * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one. 3848 * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster. 3849 * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf 3850 * contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters 3851 * are changed with respect to the last NAN config. 3852 * The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since 3853 * some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the 3854 * changed parameters. 3855 * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in 3856 * cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of 3857 * this call. 3858 * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call 3859 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with 3860 * NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal. 3861 * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports 3862 * aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation 3863 * between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while 3864 * skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU. 3865 * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available. 3866 * Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided. 3867 * 3868 * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep) 3869 * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep) 3870 * @set_tid_config: Apply TID specific configurations. This callback may sleep. 3871 * @reset_tid_config: Reset TID specific configuration for the peer. 3872 * This callback may sleep. 3873 * @update_vif_offload: Update virtual interface offload flags 3874 * This callback may sleep. 3875 * @sta_set_4addr: Called to notify the driver when a station starts/stops using 3876 * 4-address mode 3877 */ 3878 struct ieee80211_ops { 3879 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3880 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control, 3881 struct sk_buff *skb); 3882 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 3883 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 3884 #ifdef CONFIG_PM 3885 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan); 3886 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 3887 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled); 3888 #endif 3889 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3890 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3891 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3892 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3893 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p); 3894 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3895 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3896 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed); 3897 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3898 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3899 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info, 3900 u32 changed); 3901 3902 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3903 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3904 3905 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3906 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list); 3907 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3908 unsigned int changed_flags, 3909 unsigned int *total_flags, 3910 u64 multicast); 3911 void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3912 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3913 unsigned int filter_flags, 3914 unsigned int changed_flags); 3915 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 3916 bool set); 3917 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd, 3918 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 3919 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key); 3920 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3921 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3922 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf, 3923 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 3924 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key); 3925 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3926 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3927 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data); 3928 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3929 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx); 3930 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3931 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req); 3932 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3933 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3934 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3935 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3936 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req, 3937 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies); 3938 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3939 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3940 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3941 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3942 const u8 *mac_addr); 3943 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3944 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3945 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3946 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats); 3947 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3948 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 3949 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 3950 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value); 3951 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value); 3952 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3953 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 3954 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3955 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 3956 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS 3957 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3958 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3959 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 3960 struct dentry *dir); 3961 #endif 3962 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3963 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 3964 int (*sta_set_txpwr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3965 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3966 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 3967 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3968 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 3969 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state, 3970 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state); 3971 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3972 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3973 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 3974 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3975 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3976 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 3977 u32 changed); 3978 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3979 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3980 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 3981 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3982 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3983 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 3984 struct station_info *sinfo); 3985 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3986 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac, 3987 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params); 3988 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3989 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3990 u64 tsf); 3991 void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3992 s64 offset); 3993 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3994 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 3995 3996 /** 3997 * @ampdu_action: 3998 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action. 3999 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want 4000 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through 4001 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. 4002 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver 4003 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size 4004 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the 4005 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be 4006 * possible with a buf_size of 8: 4007 * 4008 * - ``TX: 1.....7`` 4009 * - ``RX: 2....7`` (lost frame #1) 4010 * - ``TX: 8..1...`` 4011 * 4012 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the 4013 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be: 4014 * 4015 * - ``TX: 1 or`` 4016 * - ``TX: 18 or`` 4017 * - ``TX: 81`` 4018 * 4019 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again. 4020 * 4021 * Returns a negative error code on failure. The driver may return 4022 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE for %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START 4023 * if the session can start immediately. 4024 * 4025 * The callback can sleep. 4026 */ 4027 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4028 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4029 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params); 4030 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx, 4031 struct survey_info *survey); 4032 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4033 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class); 4034 #ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE 4035 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4036 void *data, int len); 4037 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb, 4038 struct netlink_callback *cb, 4039 void *data, int len); 4040 #endif 4041 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4042 u32 queues, bool drop); 4043 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4044 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4045 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 4046 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant); 4047 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant); 4048 4049 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4050 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4051 struct ieee80211_channel *chan, 4052 int duration, 4053 enum ieee80211_roc_type type); 4054 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4055 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4056 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx); 4057 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4058 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max); 4059 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4060 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4061 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask); 4062 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4063 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4064 const struct ieee80211_event *event); 4065 4066 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4067 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4068 u16 tids, int num_frames, 4069 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason, 4070 bool more_data); 4071 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4072 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4073 u16 tids, int num_frames, 4074 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason, 4075 bool more_data); 4076 4077 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4078 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset); 4079 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4080 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4081 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data); 4082 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4083 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4084 u32 sset, u8 *data); 4085 4086 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4087 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4088 u16 duration); 4089 4090 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4091 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4092 4093 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4094 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4095 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4096 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4097 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4098 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx, 4099 u32 changed); 4100 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4101 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4102 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4103 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4104 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4105 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4106 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4107 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs, 4108 int n_vifs, 4109 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode); 4110 4111 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4112 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type); 4113 4114 #if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6) 4115 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4116 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4117 struct inet6_dev *idev); 4118 #endif 4119 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4120 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4121 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef); 4122 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4123 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4124 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 4125 4126 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4127 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4128 void (*abort_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4129 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4130 void (*channel_switch_rx_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4131 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4132 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 4133 4134 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4135 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4136 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4137 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4138 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4139 int *dbm); 4140 4141 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4142 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4143 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class, 4144 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 4145 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie); 4146 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4147 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4148 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4149 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4150 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4151 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params); 4152 4153 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4154 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 4155 void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4156 4157 int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4158 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4159 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf); 4160 int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4161 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4162 int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4163 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4164 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes); 4165 int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4166 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4167 const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func); 4168 void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4169 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4170 u8 instance_id); 4171 bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4172 struct sk_buff *head, 4173 struct sk_buff *skb); 4174 int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4175 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4176 struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats); 4177 int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4178 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request); 4179 void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4180 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request); 4181 int (*set_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4182 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4183 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4184 struct cfg80211_tid_config *tid_conf); 4185 int (*reset_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4186 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4187 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tids); 4188 void (*update_vif_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4189 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4190 void (*sta_set_4addr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4191 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled); 4192 }; 4193 4194 /** 4195 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device 4196 * 4197 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer 4198 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions. 4199 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by 4200 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as 4201 * @priv_data_len. 4202 * 4203 * @priv_data_len: length of private data 4204 * @ops: callbacks for this device 4205 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device. 4206 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d) 4207 * 4208 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error. 4209 */ 4210 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len, 4211 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops, 4212 const char *requested_name); 4213 4214 /** 4215 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device 4216 * 4217 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer 4218 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions. 4219 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by 4220 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as 4221 * @priv_data_len. 4222 * 4223 * @priv_data_len: length of private data 4224 * @ops: callbacks for this device 4225 * 4226 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error. 4227 */ 4228 static inline 4229 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len, 4230 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops) 4231 { 4232 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL); 4233 } 4234 4235 /** 4236 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device 4237 * 4238 * You must call this function before any other functions in 4239 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you 4240 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information. 4241 * 4242 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw() 4243 * 4244 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise. 4245 */ 4246 int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4247 4248 /** 4249 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description 4250 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec 4251 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds 4252 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period) 4253 */ 4254 struct ieee80211_tpt_blink { 4255 int throughput; 4256 int blink_time; 4257 }; 4258 4259 /** 4260 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags 4261 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio 4262 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working 4263 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one 4264 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP 4265 */ 4266 enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags { 4267 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0), 4268 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1), 4269 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2), 4270 }; 4271 4272 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4273 const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4274 const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4275 const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4276 const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4277 const char * 4278 __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4279 unsigned int flags, 4280 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table, 4281 unsigned int blink_table_len); 4282 #endif 4283 /** 4284 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED 4285 * 4286 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4287 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4288 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4289 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4290 * 4291 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4292 * 4293 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4294 */ 4295 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4296 { 4297 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4298 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw); 4299 #else 4300 return NULL; 4301 #endif 4302 } 4303 4304 /** 4305 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED 4306 * 4307 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4308 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4309 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4310 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4311 * 4312 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4313 * 4314 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4315 */ 4316 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4317 { 4318 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4319 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw); 4320 #else 4321 return NULL; 4322 #endif 4323 } 4324 4325 /** 4326 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED 4327 * 4328 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4329 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4330 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4331 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4332 * 4333 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4334 * 4335 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4336 */ 4337 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4338 { 4339 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4340 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw); 4341 #else 4342 return NULL; 4343 #endif 4344 } 4345 4346 /** 4347 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED 4348 * 4349 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4350 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4351 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4352 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4353 * 4354 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4355 * 4356 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4357 */ 4358 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4359 { 4360 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4361 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw); 4362 #else 4363 return NULL; 4364 #endif 4365 } 4366 4367 /** 4368 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger 4369 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for 4370 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags 4371 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput 4372 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table 4373 * 4374 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are 4375 * configured) or the name of the new trigger. 4376 * 4377 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw(). 4378 */ 4379 static inline const char * 4380 ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags, 4381 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table, 4382 unsigned int blink_table_len) 4383 { 4384 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4385 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table, 4386 blink_table_len); 4387 #else 4388 return NULL; 4389 #endif 4390 } 4391 4392 /** 4393 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device 4394 * 4395 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources 4396 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem. 4397 * 4398 * @hw: the hardware to unregister 4399 */ 4400 void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4401 4402 /** 4403 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor 4404 * 4405 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the 4406 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw() 4407 * before calling this function. 4408 * 4409 * @hw: the hardware to free 4410 */ 4411 void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4412 4413 /** 4414 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely 4415 * 4416 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason 4417 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state 4418 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware 4419 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by 4420 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all 4421 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function. 4422 * 4423 * @hw: the hardware to restart 4424 */ 4425 void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4426 4427 /** 4428 * ieee80211_rx_list - receive frame and store processed skbs in a list 4429 * 4430 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 4431 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 4432 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 4433 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 4434 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 4435 * 4436 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 4437 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 4438 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 4439 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 4440 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4441 * 4442 * This function must be called with BHs disabled and RCU read lock 4443 * 4444 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4445 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL 4446 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4447 * @list: the destination list 4448 */ 4449 void ieee80211_rx_list(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4450 struct sk_buff *skb, struct list_head *list); 4451 4452 /** 4453 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context 4454 * 4455 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 4456 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 4457 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 4458 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 4459 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 4460 * 4461 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 4462 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 4463 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 4464 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 4465 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4466 * 4467 * This function must be called with BHs disabled. 4468 * 4469 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4470 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL 4471 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4472 * @napi: the NAPI context 4473 */ 4474 void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4475 struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi); 4476 4477 /** 4478 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame 4479 * 4480 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 4481 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 4482 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 4483 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 4484 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 4485 * 4486 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 4487 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 4488 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 4489 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 4490 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4491 * 4492 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni(). 4493 * 4494 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4495 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4496 */ 4497 static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb) 4498 { 4499 ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL); 4500 } 4501 4502 /** 4503 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame 4504 * 4505 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context 4506 * (internally defers to a tasklet.) 4507 * 4508 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not 4509 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with 4510 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4511 * 4512 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4513 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4514 */ 4515 void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb); 4516 4517 /** 4518 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context) 4519 * 4520 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context 4521 * (internally disables bottom halves). 4522 * 4523 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may 4524 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 4525 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4526 * 4527 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4528 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4529 */ 4530 static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4531 struct sk_buff *skb) 4532 { 4533 local_bh_disable(); 4534 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb); 4535 local_bh_enable(); 4536 } 4537 4538 /** 4539 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta 4540 * 4541 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS 4542 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station 4543 * entering/leaving PS mode. 4544 * 4545 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled. 4546 * 4547 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against 4548 * each other. 4549 * 4550 * @sta: currently connected sta 4551 * @start: start or stop PS 4552 * 4553 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set. 4554 */ 4555 int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start); 4556 4557 /** 4558 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta 4559 * (in process context) 4560 * 4561 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context 4562 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still 4563 * applies. 4564 * 4565 * @sta: currently connected sta 4566 * @start: start or stop PS 4567 * 4568 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(). 4569 */ 4570 static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4571 bool start) 4572 { 4573 int ret; 4574 4575 local_bh_disable(); 4576 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start); 4577 local_bh_enable(); 4578 4579 return ret; 4580 } 4581 4582 /** 4583 * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received 4584 * @sta: currently connected station 4585 * 4586 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set, 4587 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a 4588 * connected station was received. 4589 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() 4590 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must 4591 * be serialized. 4592 */ 4593 void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4594 4595 /** 4596 * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received 4597 * @sta: currently connected station 4598 * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame 4599 * 4600 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set, 4601 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame 4602 * from a connected station was received. 4603 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() 4604 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be 4605 * serialized. 4606 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown. 4607 * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC 4608 * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper 4609 * checks. 4610 */ 4611 void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 4612 4613 /* 4614 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions. 4615 * This is enough for the radiotap header. 4616 */ 4617 #define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM ALIGN(14, 4) 4618 4619 /** 4620 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames 4621 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station 4622 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames 4623 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID 4624 * 4625 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing 4626 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need 4627 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit. 4628 * 4629 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are 4630 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data 4631 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim 4632 * call! Beware of the locking!) 4633 * 4634 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD) 4635 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are 4636 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes 4637 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data, 4638 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered 4639 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP). 4640 * 4641 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per 4642 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since 4643 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the 4644 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that 4645 * use this API. 4646 */ 4647 void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4648 u8 tid, bool buffered); 4649 4650 /** 4651 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet 4652 * 4653 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support 4654 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent 4655 * rate selection table for the station entry. 4656 * 4657 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4658 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent. 4659 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted. 4660 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information 4661 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch 4662 */ 4663 void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4664 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4665 struct sk_buff *skb, 4666 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest, 4667 int max_rates); 4668 4669 /** 4670 * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station 4671 * 4672 * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput 4673 * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can 4674 * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station 4675 * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic 4676 * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause 4677 * slow stations to starve). 4678 * 4679 * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for. 4680 * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps. 4681 */ 4682 void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, 4683 u32 thr); 4684 4685 /** 4686 * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback 4687 * 4688 * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta 4689 * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision 4690 * in updating the tx rate in data path. 4691 * 4692 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 4693 * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for. 4694 * @info: tx status information 4695 */ 4696 void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4697 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, 4698 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info); 4699 4700 /** 4701 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback 4702 * 4703 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been 4704 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for 4705 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics. 4706 * 4707 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 4708 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls 4709 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() 4710 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 4711 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni(). 4712 * 4713 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 4714 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 4715 */ 4716 void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4717 struct sk_buff *skb); 4718 4719 /** 4720 * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback 4721 * 4722 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status 4723 * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not 4724 * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info. 4725 * 4726 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized 4727 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() 4728 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 4729 * 4730 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 4731 * @status: tx status information 4732 */ 4733 void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4734 struct ieee80211_tx_status *status); 4735 4736 /** 4737 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb 4738 * 4739 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status 4740 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to 4741 * specific skbs. 4742 * 4743 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized 4744 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() 4745 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 4746 * 4747 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 4748 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent 4749 * (NULL for multicast packets) 4750 * @info: tx status information 4751 */ 4752 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4753 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4754 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 4755 { 4756 struct ieee80211_tx_status status = { 4757 .sta = sta, 4758 .info = info, 4759 }; 4760 4761 ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status); 4762 } 4763 4764 /** 4765 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context) 4766 * 4767 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context. 4768 * 4769 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and 4770 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed 4771 * for a single hardware. 4772 * 4773 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 4774 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 4775 */ 4776 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4777 struct sk_buff *skb) 4778 { 4779 local_bh_disable(); 4780 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb); 4781 local_bh_enable(); 4782 } 4783 4784 /** 4785 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback 4786 * 4787 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context 4788 * (internally defers to a tasklet.) 4789 * 4790 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and 4791 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 4792 * 4793 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 4794 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 4795 */ 4796 void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4797 struct sk_buff *skb); 4798 4799 /** 4800 * ieee80211_tx_status_8023 - transmit status callback for 802.3 frame format 4801 * 4802 * Call this function for all transmitted data frames after their transmit 4803 * completion. This callback should only be called for data frames which 4804 * are using driver's (or hardware's) offload capability of encap/decap 4805 * 802.11 frames. 4806 * 4807 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 4808 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other and all 4809 * calls in the same tx status family. 4810 * 4811 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 4812 * @vif: the interface for which the frame was transmitted 4813 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 4814 */ 4815 void ieee80211_tx_status_8023(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4816 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4817 struct sk_buff *skb); 4818 4819 /** 4820 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station 4821 * 4822 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding 4823 * connected STA. 4824 * 4825 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta 4826 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response 4827 */ 4828 void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets); 4829 4830 #define IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM 2 4831 4832 /** 4833 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets 4834 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element 4835 * @tim_length: size of TIM element 4836 * @cntdwn_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM offsets 4837 * to countdown counters. This array can contain zero values which 4838 * should be ignored. 4839 */ 4840 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets { 4841 u16 tim_offset; 4842 u16 tim_length; 4843 4844 u16 cntdwn_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM]; 4845 }; 4846 4847 /** 4848 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function 4849 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 4850 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4851 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will 4852 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver. 4853 * 4854 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to 4855 * obtain the beacon template. 4856 * 4857 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the 4858 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template 4859 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when 4860 * applicable, the CSA count. 4861 * 4862 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 4863 * 4864 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error. 4865 */ 4866 struct sk_buff * 4867 ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4868 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4869 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs); 4870 4871 /** 4872 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function 4873 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 4874 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4875 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset. 4876 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes). 4877 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length, 4878 * (including the ID and length bytes!). 4879 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes). 4880 * 4881 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to 4882 * obtain the beacon frame. 4883 * 4884 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 4885 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon 4886 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly 4887 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt). 4888 * 4889 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 4890 * 4891 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error. 4892 */ 4893 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4894 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4895 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length); 4896 4897 /** 4898 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function 4899 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 4900 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4901 * 4902 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(). 4903 * 4904 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(). 4905 */ 4906 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4907 struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 4908 { 4909 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL); 4910 } 4911 4912 /** 4913 * ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn - request mac80211 to decrement the beacon countdown 4914 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4915 * 4916 * The beacon counter should be updated after each beacon transmission. 4917 * This function is called implicitly when 4918 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the 4919 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this 4920 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's beacon countdown. 4921 * 4922 * Return: new countdown value 4923 */ 4924 u8 ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4925 4926 /** 4927 * ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn - request mac80211 to set beacon countdown 4928 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4929 * @counter: the new value for the counter 4930 * 4931 * The beacon countdown can be changed by the device, this API should be 4932 * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211. 4933 * 4934 * It should never be used together with ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(), 4935 * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value. 4936 */ 4937 void ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter); 4938 4939 /** 4940 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch 4941 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4942 * 4943 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this 4944 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to 4945 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed. 4946 */ 4947 void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4948 4949 /** 4950 * ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete - find out if countdown reached 1 4951 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4952 * 4953 * This function returns whether the countdown reached zero. 4954 */ 4955 bool ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4956 4957 /** 4958 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template 4959 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 4960 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4961 * 4962 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to 4963 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller. 4964 * 4965 * Can only be called in AP mode. 4966 * 4967 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error. 4968 */ 4969 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4970 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4971 4972 /** 4973 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template 4974 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 4975 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4976 * 4977 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to 4978 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct 4979 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used. 4980 * 4981 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the 4982 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit. 4983 * 4984 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error. 4985 */ 4986 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4987 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4988 4989 /** 4990 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template 4991 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 4992 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4993 * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set 4994 * if at all possible 4995 * 4996 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to 4997 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct 4998 * BSSID and address is used. 4999 * 5000 * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the 5001 * returned packet will be QoS NDP. 5002 * 5003 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the 5004 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields. 5005 * 5006 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error. 5007 */ 5008 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5009 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5010 bool qos_ok); 5011 5012 /** 5013 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template 5014 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5015 * @src_addr: source MAC address 5016 * @ssid: SSID buffer 5017 * @ssid_len: length of SSID 5018 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs 5019 * 5020 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to 5021 * hardware. 5022 * 5023 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error. 5024 */ 5025 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5026 const u8 *src_addr, 5027 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len, 5028 size_t tailroom); 5029 5030 /** 5031 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function 5032 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5033 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5034 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS. 5035 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets). 5036 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5037 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame. 5038 * 5039 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 5040 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5041 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible 5042 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed. 5043 */ 5044 void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5045 const void *frame, size_t frame_len, 5046 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl, 5047 struct ieee80211_rts *rts); 5048 5049 /** 5050 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame 5051 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5052 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5053 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS. 5054 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5055 * 5056 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide 5057 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5058 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder. 5059 * 5060 * Return: The duration. 5061 */ 5062 __le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5063 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len, 5064 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl); 5065 5066 /** 5067 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function 5068 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5069 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5070 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self. 5071 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets). 5072 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5073 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame. 5074 * 5075 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 5076 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5077 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible 5078 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed. 5079 */ 5080 void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5081 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5082 const void *frame, size_t frame_len, 5083 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl, 5084 struct ieee80211_cts *cts); 5085 5086 /** 5087 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame 5088 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5089 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5090 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self. 5091 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5092 * 5093 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide 5094 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5095 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder. 5096 * 5097 * Return: The duration. 5098 */ 5099 __le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5100 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5101 size_t frame_len, 5102 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl); 5103 5104 /** 5105 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame 5106 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5107 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5108 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on 5109 * @frame_len: the length of the frame. 5110 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted. 5111 * 5112 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its 5113 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps). 5114 * 5115 * Return: The duration. 5116 */ 5117 __le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5118 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5119 enum nl80211_band band, 5120 size_t frame_len, 5121 struct ieee80211_rate *rate); 5122 5123 /** 5124 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames 5125 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5126 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5127 * 5128 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If 5129 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast 5130 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host 5131 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered 5132 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame. 5133 * 5134 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered 5135 * frames are available. 5136 * 5137 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was 5138 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus 5139 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns 5140 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver 5141 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to 5142 * use common code for all beacons. 5143 */ 5144 struct sk_buff * 5145 ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5146 5147 /** 5148 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32 5149 * 5150 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32. 5151 * 5152 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5153 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for 5154 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 5155 */ 5156 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5157 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k); 5158 5159 /** 5160 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key 5161 * 5162 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken 5163 * from the given packet. 5164 * 5165 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5166 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted 5167 * with this P1K 5168 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 5169 */ 5170 static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5171 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k) 5172 { 5173 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data; 5174 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control); 5175 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]); 5176 5177 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k); 5178 } 5179 5180 /** 5181 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX 5182 * 5183 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32 5184 * and transmitter address. 5185 * 5186 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5187 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key 5188 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for 5189 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 5190 */ 5191 void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5192 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k); 5193 5194 /** 5195 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key 5196 * 5197 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values 5198 * in the packet. 5199 * 5200 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5201 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be 5202 * encrypted with this key 5203 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes 5204 */ 5205 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5206 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k); 5207 5208 /** 5209 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos 5210 * 5211 * @pos: start of crypto header 5212 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5213 * @pn: PN to add 5214 * 5215 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of 5216 * the packet payload) 5217 * 5218 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should 5219 * point to the crypto header) 5220 */ 5221 u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn); 5222 5223 /** 5224 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter 5225 * 5226 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5227 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only); 5228 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For 5229 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid. 5230 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data 5231 * 5232 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs 5233 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done 5234 * by the device and not by mac80211. 5235 * 5236 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing 5237 * can be done concurrently. 5238 */ 5239 void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5240 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 5241 5242 /** 5243 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter 5244 * 5245 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5246 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only); 5247 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For 5248 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid. 5249 * @seq: new sequence data 5250 * 5251 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the 5252 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK 5253 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called 5254 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211. 5255 * 5256 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing 5257 * can be done concurrently. 5258 */ 5259 void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5260 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 5261 5262 /** 5263 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key 5264 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5265 * 5266 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the 5267 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but 5268 * instead assumed to have been removed already. 5269 * 5270 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently) 5271 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().) 5272 */ 5273 void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 5274 5275 /** 5276 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN 5277 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on 5278 * @keyconf: new key data 5279 * 5280 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new 5281 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper 5282 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them. 5283 * 5284 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will 5285 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to 5286 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an 5287 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc. 5288 * 5289 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware 5290 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK 5291 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver 5292 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses 5293 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part 5294 * of the reconfiguration. 5295 * 5296 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq() 5297 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly. 5298 * 5299 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware, 5300 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases 5301 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for 5302 * the key that's being replaced. 5303 */ 5304 struct ieee80211_key_conf * 5305 ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5306 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 5307 5308 /** 5309 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying 5310 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on 5311 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association 5312 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying 5313 * @gfp: allocation flags 5314 */ 5315 void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid, 5316 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp); 5317 5318 /** 5319 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue 5320 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5321 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 5322 * 5323 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue. 5324 */ 5325 void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 5326 5327 /** 5328 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue 5329 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5330 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 5331 * 5332 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue. 5333 */ 5334 void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 5335 5336 /** 5337 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue 5338 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5339 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 5340 * 5341 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue. 5342 * 5343 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise. 5344 */ 5345 5346 int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 5347 5348 /** 5349 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues 5350 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5351 * 5352 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue. 5353 */ 5354 void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5355 5356 /** 5357 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues 5358 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5359 * 5360 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue. 5361 */ 5362 void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5363 5364 /** 5365 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan 5366 * 5367 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is 5368 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify 5369 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from 5370 * any context, including hardirq context. 5371 * 5372 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan 5373 * @info: information about the completed scan 5374 */ 5375 void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5376 struct cfg80211_scan_info *info); 5377 5378 /** 5379 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan 5380 * 5381 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the 5382 * driver whenever there are new scan results available. 5383 * 5384 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans 5385 */ 5386 void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5387 5388 /** 5389 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped 5390 * 5391 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by 5392 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task. 5393 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan 5394 * while associating, for instance. 5395 * 5396 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans 5397 */ 5398 void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5399 5400 /** 5401 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags 5402 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have 5403 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware 5404 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new 5405 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they 5406 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet. 5407 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all 5408 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet. 5409 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up). 5410 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER: Skip any interfaces where SDATA 5411 * is not in the driver. This may fix crashes during firmware recovery 5412 * for instance. 5413 */ 5414 enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags { 5415 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0, 5416 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0), 5417 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1), 5418 IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER = BIT(2), 5419 }; 5420 5421 /** 5422 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces 5423 * 5424 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 5425 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as 5426 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep. 5427 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 5428 * 5429 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5430 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 5431 * @iterator: the iterator function to call 5432 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5433 */ 5434 void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags, 5435 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac, 5436 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 5437 void *data); 5438 5439 /** 5440 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces 5441 * 5442 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 5443 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 5444 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator 5445 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can 5446 * be used. 5447 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 5448 * 5449 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5450 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 5451 * @iterator: the iterator function to call 5452 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5453 */ 5454 static inline void 5455 ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags, 5456 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac, 5457 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 5458 void *data) 5459 { 5460 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw, 5461 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE, 5462 iterator, data); 5463 } 5464 5465 /** 5466 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces 5467 * 5468 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 5469 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 5470 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic, 5471 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead. 5472 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 5473 * 5474 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5475 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 5476 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 5477 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5478 */ 5479 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5480 u32 iter_flags, 5481 void (*iterator)(void *data, 5482 u8 *mac, 5483 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 5484 void *data); 5485 5486 /** 5487 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces 5488 * 5489 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 5490 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 5491 * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL. 5492 * 5493 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5494 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 5495 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 5496 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5497 */ 5498 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5499 u32 iter_flags, 5500 void (*iterator)(void *data, 5501 u8 *mac, 5502 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 5503 void *data); 5504 5505 /** 5506 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations 5507 * 5508 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given 5509 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback 5510 * function for them. 5511 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic, 5512 * 5513 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5514 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 5515 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5516 */ 5517 void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5518 void (*iterator)(void *data, 5519 struct ieee80211_sta *sta), 5520 void *data); 5521 /** 5522 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue 5523 * 5524 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue. 5525 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be. 5526 * 5527 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for 5528 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue 5529 */ 5530 void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work); 5531 5532 /** 5533 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue 5534 * 5535 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211 5536 * workqueue. 5537 * 5538 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for 5539 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue 5540 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing 5541 */ 5542 void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5543 struct delayed_work *dwork, 5544 unsigned long delay); 5545 5546 /** 5547 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session. 5548 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session 5549 * @tid: the TID to BA on. 5550 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs) 5551 * 5552 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise 5553 * 5554 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate 5555 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level 5556 * will be managed by the mac80211. 5557 */ 5558 int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid, 5559 u16 timeout); 5560 5561 /** 5562 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate. 5563 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 5564 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient. 5565 * @tid: the TID to BA on. 5566 * 5567 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has 5568 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called 5569 * from any context. 5570 */ 5571 void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra, 5572 u16 tid); 5573 5574 /** 5575 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session. 5576 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop 5577 * @tid: the TID to stop BA. 5578 * 5579 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active 5580 * 5581 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate 5582 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level 5583 * will be managed by the mac80211. 5584 */ 5585 int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid); 5586 5587 /** 5588 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate. 5589 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 5590 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient. 5591 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on. 5592 * 5593 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has 5594 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It 5595 * can be called from any context. 5596 */ 5597 void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra, 5598 u16 tid); 5599 5600 /** 5601 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station 5602 * 5603 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on 5604 * @addr: station's address 5605 * 5606 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise. 5607 * 5608 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the 5609 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well. 5610 */ 5611 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5612 const u8 *addr); 5613 5614 /** 5615 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware 5616 * 5617 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 5618 * @addr: remote station's address 5619 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'. 5620 * 5621 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise. 5622 * 5623 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the 5624 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well. 5625 * 5626 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get 5627 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'. 5628 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple 5629 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another 5630 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first). 5631 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL 5632 * is not reliable. 5633 * 5634 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible. 5635 */ 5636 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5637 const u8 *addr, 5638 const u8 *localaddr); 5639 5640 /** 5641 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up 5642 * @hw: the hardware 5643 * @pubsta: the station 5644 * @block: whether to block or unblock 5645 * 5646 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues 5647 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before 5648 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be 5649 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected 5650 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag. 5651 * 5652 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free 5653 * manner. 5654 * 5655 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames 5656 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not 5657 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call 5658 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to 5659 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the 5660 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must 5661 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will 5662 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if 5663 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also 5664 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver 5665 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after 5666 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually 5667 * woke up while blocked or not. 5668 */ 5669 void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5670 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block); 5671 5672 /** 5673 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP 5674 * @pubsta: the station 5675 * 5676 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell 5677 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the 5678 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead. 5679 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD. 5680 * 5681 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must 5682 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function 5683 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or 5684 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix! 5685 * 5686 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no 5687 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if 5688 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history 5689 * and restore the _irqsafe version! 5690 */ 5691 void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta); 5692 5693 /** 5694 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP 5695 * @pubsta: the station 5696 * @tid: the tid of the NDP 5697 * 5698 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close 5699 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when 5700 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window. 5701 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a 5702 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the 5703 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to 5704 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any 5705 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong. 5706 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame 5707 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save. 5708 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames(). 5709 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver 5710 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call 5711 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent. 5712 */ 5713 void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid); 5714 5715 /** 5716 * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid 5717 * 5718 * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver must call 5719 * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of 5720 * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule 5721 * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness. 5722 * 5723 * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent 5724 * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not 5725 * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the 5726 * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame 5727 * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission 5728 * attempts. 5729 * 5730 * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or 5731 * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available. 5732 * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of 5733 * them to 0. 5734 * 5735 * @pubsta: the station 5736 * @tid: the TID to register airtime for 5737 * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec) 5738 * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec) 5739 */ 5740 void ieee80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid, 5741 u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime); 5742 5743 /** 5744 * ieee80211_txq_airtime_check - check if a txq can send frame to device 5745 * 5746 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 5747 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 5748 * 5749 * Return true if the AQL's airtime limit has not been reached and the txq can 5750 * continue to send more packets to the device. Otherwise return false. 5751 */ 5752 bool 5753 ieee80211_txq_airtime_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 5754 5755 /** 5756 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device 5757 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 5758 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all 5759 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key 5760 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function 5761 * 5762 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to 5763 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into 5764 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device 5765 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due 5766 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few 5767 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep. 5768 * 5769 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order 5770 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the 5771 * set_key callback. 5772 */ 5773 void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5774 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5775 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5776 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5777 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5778 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 5779 void *data), 5780 void *iter_data); 5781 5782 /** 5783 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device 5784 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 5785 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all 5786 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key 5787 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function 5788 * 5789 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to 5790 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into 5791 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station 5792 * in removal process will be skipped. 5793 * 5794 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section, 5795 * and thus iter must be atomic. 5796 */ 5797 void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5798 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5799 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5800 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5801 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5802 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 5803 void *data), 5804 void *iter_data); 5805 5806 /** 5807 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts 5808 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5809 * @iter: iterator function 5810 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function 5811 * 5812 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and 5813 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other 5814 * places while calling into the driver. 5815 * 5816 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during 5817 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being 5818 * removed. 5819 * 5820 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed 5821 * before the restart are considered already present so will be 5822 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already 5823 * or not. 5824 */ 5825 void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic( 5826 struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5827 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5828 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf, 5829 void *data), 5830 void *iter_data); 5831 5832 /** 5833 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template 5834 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5835 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5836 * 5837 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to 5838 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate 5839 * information. This function must only be called from within the 5840 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function 5841 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return 5842 * %NULL. 5843 * 5844 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error. 5845 */ 5846 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5847 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5848 5849 /** 5850 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons 5851 * 5852 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5853 * 5854 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and 5855 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the 5856 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function. 5857 */ 5858 void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5859 5860 /** 5861 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP 5862 * 5863 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5864 * 5865 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and 5866 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver 5867 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost. 5868 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated 5869 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set. 5870 * 5871 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state, 5872 * without connection recovery attempts. 5873 */ 5874 void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5875 5876 /** 5877 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume 5878 * 5879 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5880 * 5881 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume. 5882 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the 5883 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were 5884 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or 5885 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume. 5886 * 5887 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses 5888 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface 5889 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then 5890 * disconnect normally later. 5891 * 5892 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and 5893 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it 5894 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the 5895 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto). 5896 */ 5897 void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5898 5899 /** 5900 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring 5901 * rssi threshold triggered 5902 * 5903 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5904 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type 5905 * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available 5906 * @gfp: context flags 5907 * 5908 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality 5909 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform 5910 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold. 5911 */ 5912 void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5913 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event, 5914 s32 rssi_level, 5915 gfp_t gfp); 5916 5917 /** 5918 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss 5919 * 5920 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5921 * @gfp: context flags 5922 */ 5923 void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp); 5924 5925 /** 5926 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected 5927 * 5928 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 5929 */ 5930 void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5931 5932 /** 5933 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process 5934 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5935 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not 5936 * 5937 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel 5938 * and wake up the suspended queues. 5939 */ 5940 void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success); 5941 5942 /** 5943 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition 5944 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5945 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode 5946 * 5947 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed 5948 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than 5949 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth. 5950 */ 5951 void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5952 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode); 5953 5954 /** 5955 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start 5956 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 5957 */ 5958 void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5959 5960 /** 5961 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired 5962 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 5963 */ 5964 void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5965 5966 /** 5967 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions 5968 * 5969 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device 5970 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba 5971 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs 5972 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)." 5973 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and 5974 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation. 5975 * 5976 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5977 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid 5978 * @addr: & to bssid mac address 5979 */ 5980 void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap, 5981 const u8 *addr); 5982 5983 /** 5984 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered 5985 * @pubsta: station struct 5986 * @tid: the session's TID 5987 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are 5988 * assumed to be out of the window after the call 5989 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc. 5990 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware 5991 * 5992 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and 5993 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it 5994 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released 5995 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.) 5996 */ 5997 void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid, 5998 u16 ssn, u64 filtered, 5999 u16 received_mpdus); 6000 6001 /** 6002 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame 6003 * 6004 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder 6005 * buffer. 6006 * 6007 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6008 * @ra: the peer's destination address 6009 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session 6010 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver 6011 */ 6012 void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn); 6013 6014 /** 6015 * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work 6016 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6017 * @addr: station mac address 6018 * @tid: the rx tid 6019 */ 6020 void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr, 6021 unsigned int tid); 6022 6023 /** 6024 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session 6025 * 6026 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including 6027 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx 6028 * reordering. 6029 * 6030 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here 6031 * when they complete AddBa negotiation. 6032 * 6033 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6034 * @addr: station mac address 6035 * @tid: the rx tid 6036 */ 6037 static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6038 const u8 *addr, u16 tid) 6039 { 6040 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS)) 6041 return; 6042 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid); 6043 } 6044 6045 /** 6046 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session 6047 * 6048 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including 6049 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx 6050 * reordering. 6051 * 6052 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here 6053 * when they complete DelBa negotiation. 6054 * 6055 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6056 * @addr: station mac address 6057 * @tid: the rx tid 6058 */ 6059 static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6060 const u8 *addr, u16 tid) 6061 { 6062 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS)) 6063 return; 6064 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS); 6065 } 6066 6067 /** 6068 * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout 6069 * 6070 * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx 6071 * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer. 6072 * 6073 * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa. 6074 * 6075 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6076 * @addr: station mac address 6077 * @tid: the rx tid 6078 */ 6079 void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6080 const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid); 6081 6082 /* Rate control API */ 6083 6084 /** 6085 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo 6086 * 6087 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for. 6088 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on. 6089 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration 6090 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs 6091 * to be filled in 6092 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate 6093 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and 6094 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network. 6095 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the 6096 * RTS threshold 6097 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission 6098 * if the selected rate supports it 6099 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask 6100 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use) 6101 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode 6102 */ 6103 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control { 6104 struct ieee80211_hw *hw; 6105 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband; 6106 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf; 6107 struct sk_buff *skb; 6108 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate; 6109 bool rts, short_preamble; 6110 u32 rate_idx_mask; 6111 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask; 6112 bool bss; 6113 }; 6114 6115 /** 6116 * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities 6117 */ 6118 enum rate_control_capabilities { 6119 /** 6120 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: 6121 * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable) 6122 * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains 6123 * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has, 6124 * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us. 6125 */ 6126 RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0), 6127 }; 6128 6129 struct rate_control_ops { 6130 unsigned long capa; 6131 const char *name; 6132 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6133 void (*add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, void *priv, 6134 struct dentry *debugfsdir); 6135 void (*free)(void *priv); 6136 6137 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp); 6138 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6139 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 6140 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta); 6141 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6142 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 6143 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 6144 u32 changed); 6145 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6146 void *priv_sta); 6147 6148 void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv, 6149 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6150 void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st); 6151 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6152 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 6153 struct sk_buff *skb); 6154 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 6155 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc); 6156 6157 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta, 6158 struct dentry *dir); 6159 6160 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta); 6161 }; 6162 6163 static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6164 enum nl80211_band band, 6165 int index) 6166 { 6167 return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index)); 6168 } 6169 6170 static inline s8 6171 rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6172 struct ieee80211_sta *sta) 6173 { 6174 int i; 6175 6176 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++) 6177 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i)) 6178 return i; 6179 6180 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */ 6181 WARN_ON_ONCE(1); 6182 6183 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */ 6184 return 0; 6185 } 6186 6187 static inline 6188 bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6189 struct ieee80211_sta *sta) 6190 { 6191 unsigned int i; 6192 6193 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++) 6194 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i)) 6195 return true; 6196 return false; 6197 } 6198 6199 /** 6200 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver 6201 * 6202 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass 6203 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station 6204 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on 6205 * the most recent rate control module decision. 6206 * 6207 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6208 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. 6209 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station. 6210 */ 6211 int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6212 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, 6213 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates); 6214 6215 int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops); 6216 void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops); 6217 6218 static inline bool 6219 conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6220 { 6221 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20; 6222 } 6223 6224 static inline bool 6225 conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6226 { 6227 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 && 6228 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq; 6229 } 6230 6231 static inline bool 6232 conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6233 { 6234 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 && 6235 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq; 6236 } 6237 6238 static inline bool 6239 conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6240 { 6241 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40; 6242 } 6243 6244 static inline bool 6245 conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6246 { 6247 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) && 6248 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) && 6249 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT); 6250 } 6251 6252 static inline enum nl80211_iftype 6253 ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p) 6254 { 6255 if (p2p) { 6256 switch (type) { 6257 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION: 6258 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT; 6259 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP: 6260 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO; 6261 default: 6262 break; 6263 } 6264 } 6265 return type; 6266 } 6267 6268 static inline enum nl80211_iftype 6269 ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 6270 { 6271 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p); 6272 } 6273 6274 /** 6275 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data 6276 * 6277 * @vif: the specified virtual interface 6278 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group 6279 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group 6280 * 6281 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and 6282 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the 6283 * matching GroupId management frame. 6284 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path. 6285 */ 6286 void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6287 const u8 *membership, const u8 *position); 6288 6289 void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6290 int rssi_min_thold, 6291 int rssi_max_thold); 6292 6293 void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6294 6295 /** 6296 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface 6297 * 6298 * @vif: the specified virtual interface 6299 * 6300 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid. 6301 * 6302 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not 6303 * applicable. 6304 */ 6305 int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6306 6307 /** 6308 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup 6309 * @vif: virtual interface 6310 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s) 6311 * @gfp: allocation flags 6312 * 6313 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(). 6314 */ 6315 void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6316 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup, 6317 gfp_t gfp); 6318 6319 /** 6320 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission 6321 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6322 * @vif: virtual interface 6323 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver 6324 * @band: the band to transmit on 6325 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to 6326 * 6327 * Note: must be called under RCU lock 6328 */ 6329 bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6330 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb, 6331 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta); 6332 6333 /** 6334 * Sanity-check and parse the radiotap header of injected frames 6335 * @skb: packet injected by userspace 6336 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device 6337 */ 6338 bool ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap(struct sk_buff *skb, 6339 struct net_device *dev); 6340 6341 /** 6342 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state 6343 * 6344 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change 6345 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending 6346 * 6347 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent 6348 * 6349 * private: 6350 * 6351 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors 6352 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA 6353 */ 6354 struct ieee80211_noa_data { 6355 u32 next_tsf; 6356 bool has_next_tsf; 6357 6358 u8 absent; 6359 6360 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX]; 6361 struct { 6362 u32 start; 6363 u32 duration; 6364 u32 interval; 6365 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX]; 6366 }; 6367 6368 /** 6369 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE 6370 * 6371 * @attr: P2P NoA IE 6372 * @data: NoA tracking data 6373 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp 6374 * 6375 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors 6376 */ 6377 int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr, 6378 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf); 6379 6380 /** 6381 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change 6382 * 6383 * @data: NoA tracking data 6384 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp 6385 */ 6386 void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf); 6387 6388 /** 6389 * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation 6390 * @vif: virtual interface 6391 * @peer: the peer's destination address 6392 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation 6393 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown 6394 * @gfp: allocation flags 6395 * 6396 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request(). 6397 */ 6398 void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer, 6399 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper, 6400 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp); 6401 6402 /** 6403 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID 6404 * 6405 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from 6406 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such 6407 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID, 6408 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks 6409 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be 6410 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC. 6411 * 6412 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it 6413 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should 6414 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback. 6415 * 6416 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for 6417 * @tid: the TID to reserve 6418 * 6419 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure 6420 */ 6421 int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 6422 6423 /** 6424 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID 6425 * 6426 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function 6427 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for 6428 * preventing use of this TID in the driver. 6429 * 6430 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called 6431 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called 6432 * from the driver's @sta_state callback. 6433 * 6434 * @sta: the station 6435 * @tid: the TID to unreserve 6436 */ 6437 void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 6438 6439 /** 6440 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue 6441 * 6442 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6443 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from 6444 * ieee80211_next_txq() 6445 * 6446 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available. 6447 * 6448 * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section, 6449 * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in 6450 * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by RCU and thus the 6451 * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call 6452 * but for the duration of the frame handling. 6453 * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method, 6454 * rcu_read_lock() is already held. 6455 * 6456 * softirqs must also be disabled when this function is called. 6457 * In process context, use ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni() instead. 6458 */ 6459 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6460 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 6461 6462 /** 6463 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue 6464 * (in process context) 6465 * 6466 * Like ieee80211_tx_dequeue() but can be called in process context 6467 * (internally disables bottom halves). 6468 * 6469 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6470 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from 6471 * ieee80211_next_txq() 6472 */ 6473 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6474 struct ieee80211_txq *txq) 6475 { 6476 struct sk_buff *skb; 6477 6478 local_bh_disable(); 6479 skb = ieee80211_tx_dequeue(hw, txq); 6480 local_bh_enable(); 6481 6482 return skb; 6483 } 6484 6485 /** 6486 * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from 6487 * 6488 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6489 * @ac: AC number to return packets from. 6490 * 6491 * Returns the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq 6492 * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the 6493 * driver has finished scheduling it. 6494 */ 6495 struct ieee80211_txq *ieee80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac); 6496 6497 /** 6498 * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - start new scheduling round for TXQs 6499 * 6500 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6501 * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for 6502 * 6503 * Should be called before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq(). 6504 * The driver must not call multiple TXQ scheduling rounds concurrently. 6505 */ 6506 void ieee80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac); 6507 6508 /* (deprecated) */ 6509 static inline void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac) 6510 { 6511 } 6512 6513 void __ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6514 struct ieee80211_txq *txq, bool force); 6515 6516 /** 6517 * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission 6518 * 6519 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6520 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 6521 * 6522 * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled, 6523 * even if mac80211 does not have any packets buffered. 6524 * 6525 * The driver may call this function if it has buffered packets for 6526 * this TXQ internally. 6527 */ 6528 static inline void 6529 ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq) 6530 { 6531 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, true); 6532 } 6533 6534 /** 6535 * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq() 6536 * 6537 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6538 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 6539 * @force: schedule txq even if mac80211 does not have any buffered packets. 6540 * 6541 * The driver may set force=true if it has buffered packets for this TXQ 6542 * internally. 6543 */ 6544 static inline void 6545 ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq, 6546 bool force) 6547 { 6548 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, force); 6549 } 6550 6551 /** 6552 * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit 6553 * 6554 * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by 6555 * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime 6556 * fairness accounting without going using the scheduling order enfored by 6557 * next_txq(). 6558 * 6559 * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to 6560 * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have 6561 * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will 6562 * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit 6563 * again. 6564 * 6565 * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be 6566 * aligned against driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates 6567 * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry 6568 * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this 6569 * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets 6570 * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq(). 6571 * 6572 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6573 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 6574 */ 6575 bool ieee80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6576 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 6577 6578 /** 6579 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq 6580 * 6581 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e. 6582 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up 6583 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa. 6584 * 6585 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 6586 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count 6587 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count 6588 */ 6589 void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq, 6590 unsigned long *frame_cnt, 6591 unsigned long *byte_cnt); 6592 6593 /** 6594 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination. 6595 * 6596 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination. 6597 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq. 6598 * 6599 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6600 * @inst_id: the local instance id 6601 * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*) 6602 * @gfp: allocation flags 6603 */ 6604 void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6605 u8 inst_id, 6606 enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason, 6607 gfp_t gfp); 6608 6609 /** 6610 * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event. 6611 * 6612 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The 6613 * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211. 6614 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq. 6615 * 6616 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6617 * @match: match event information 6618 * @gfp: allocation flags 6619 */ 6620 void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6621 struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match, 6622 gfp_t gfp); 6623 6624 /** 6625 * ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for RX. 6626 * 6627 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the 6628 * rate information in the RX status struct and the frame length. 6629 * 6630 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6631 * @status: &struct ieee80211_rx_status containing the transmission rate 6632 * information. 6633 * @len: frame length in bytes 6634 */ 6635 u32 ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6636 struct ieee80211_rx_status *status, 6637 int len); 6638 6639 /** 6640 * ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for TX. 6641 * 6642 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the 6643 * rate information in the TX info struct and the frame length. 6644 * 6645 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6646 * @info: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 6647 * @len: frame length in bytes 6648 */ 6649 u32 ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6650 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, 6651 int len); 6652 /** 6653 * ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap - enable hardware encapsulation offloading. 6654 * 6655 * This function is used to notify mac80211 that a vif can be passed raw 802.3 6656 * frames. The driver needs to then handle the 802.11 encapsulation inside the 6657 * hardware or firmware. 6658 * 6659 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6660 * @enable: indicate if the feature should be turned on or off 6661 */ 6662 bool ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool enable); 6663 6664 /** 6665 * ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl - Get FILS discovery template. 6666 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6667 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6668 * 6669 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 6670 * 6671 * Return: FILS discovery template. %NULL on error. 6672 */ 6673 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6674 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6675 6676 /** 6677 * ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl - Get unsolicited broadcast 6678 * probe response template. 6679 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6680 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6681 * 6682 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 6683 * 6684 * Return: Unsolicited broadcast probe response template. %NULL on error. 6685 */ 6686 struct sk_buff * 6687 ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6688 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6689 #endif /* MAC80211_H */ 6690